Garmin | G950 | Garmin G950 G950 NXi Tecnam 2006T Pilot's Guide - SW v0935.13

Garmin G950 G950 NXi Tecnam 2006T Pilot's Guide - SW v0935.13
G950®
Pilot’s Guide
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan
Tecnam P2006T
Garmin International, Inc. Garmin AT, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
2345 Turner Road SE
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A. Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
www.flygarmin.com
190-02286-00
Revision A
G950
Pilot’s Guide
Cirrus SR2x
Tecnam P2006T
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2017 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 0935.13 or later for the Tecnam P2006T. Some differences in operation
may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Website Address: www.flygarmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, G950® NXi, GDL®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. Garmin
SVT™, and Connext™ are trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the
express permission of Garmin.
Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications. Ryan®, TCAD® and Avidyne® are registered trademarks of Avidyne
Corporation. AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark of Penton Business Media Inc. Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks
of Honeywell International, Inc. Becker® is a registered trademark of Becker Flugfunkwerk GmbH. S-TEC® is a registered trademark of
S-TEC. NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Sirius, XM, and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio, Inc. and its subsidiaries. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
Printed in the U.S.A.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
Blank Page
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs for verification of displayed aeronautical
information. Displayed aeronautical data may not incorporate the latest NOTAM information.
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitude for compliance with air traffic control altitude requirements. The
primary barometric altimeter must be used for compliance with all air traffic control altitude regulations,
requirements, instructions, and clearances.
WARNING: Do not use basemap information (land and water data) as the sole means of navigation. Basemap
data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered only
an aid to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitude (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be relied
upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical
charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Always obtain qualified instruction prior to operational use of this equipment.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
WARNING: When using the autopilot to fly an approach with vertical guidance, the autopilot will not level
the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the altitude preselect.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Traffic information shown on system displays is provided as an aid in visually acquiring traffic.
Traffic avoidance maneuvers are based upon TCAS II Resolution Advisories , ATC guidance, or positive visual
acquisition of conflicting traffic.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, do not rely on the accuracy of attitude and
heading indications in the following geographic areas: North of 72° North latitude at all longitudes; South
of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude 75° W and 120° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W. (Northern Canada);
North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia); South of 55° South
latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New Zealand).
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for hazardous
weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate or
incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or
reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the Garmin SVT display or may
appear as a partial symbol.
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of
the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the reactive wind shear detection system display as the sole
basis for detecting wind shear conditions. The system cannot predict the conditions in which wind shear is
likely to develop.
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle avoidance. TAWS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
CAUTION: Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners containing ammonia. They will
harm the anti-reflective coating.
CAUTION: Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or
modifications could void both the warranty and affect the airworthiness of the aircraft.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the system panel
and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for
its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation
AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings, metal structures, or electromagnetic fields
can cause sensor differences that may result in nuisance miscompare annunciations during start up, shut
down, or while taxiing. If one or more of the sensed values are unavailable, the annunciation indicates no
comparison is possible.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
NOTE: The system responds to a terminal procedure based on data coded within that procedure in the
Navigation Database. Differences in system operation may be observed among similar types of procedures
due to differences in the Navigation Database coding specific to each procedure.
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen that have a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA are assured
compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each applicable
database and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation Database Declarations.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed in
SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their
impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Aviation Data Error Report’.
NOTE: The system supports approval of AC 120-76C Hardware Class 3, Software Type B Electronic Flight Bag
(EFB) electronic aeronautical chart applications. Possible additional requirements may make a secondary
source (traditional paper or additional electronic display) necessary onboard the aircraft. If the secondary
source is a Portable Electronic Device (PED), its use must be consistent with guidance in AC 120-76C.
NOTE: Lamp(s) inside this product contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of according to
local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/aboutGarmin/
environment/disposal.jsp
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms
that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more
discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after
the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: Operate G950 NXi system power through at least one cycle in a period of four days of continuous
operation to avoid an autonomous system reboot.
NOTE: The purpose of this Cockpit Reference Guide is to provide the pilot a resource with which to
find operating instructions on the major features of the system more easily. It is not intended to be a
comprehensive operating guide. Complete operating procedures for the system are found in the Pilot’s
Guide for this aircraft.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-02286-00
Revision
A
Date
06/16/2017
Page Range
Description
All
Initial Release at GDU 20.10
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Description.................................................... 1
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).......................................... 1
System Controls......................................................... 4
PFD/MFD Controls......................................................... 4
Secure Digital Cards....................................................... 6
System Operation...................................................... 7
System Power-up........................................................... 7
Normal Operation.......................................................... 8
Reversionary Mode........................................................ 9
System Annunciations.................................................. 10
System Status.............................................................. 12
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 12
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 14
Accessing System Functionality............................. 19
Softkey Function.......................................................... 19
Menus........................................................................ 23
MFD Page Groups........................................................ 24
System Settings........................................................... 27
System Utilities............................................................ 36
Display Backlighting................................................ 40
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................... 44
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 44
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 45
Altimeter.................................................................... 47
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 49
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 49
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 50
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 52
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 55
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data....................................... 63
Generic Timer.............................................................. 63
Temperature Displays................................................... 63
Wind Data.................................................................. 64
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions........... 65
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 65
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 65
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 66
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 66
190-02286-00 Rev. A
2.4 Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)............ 68
SVT Operation............................................................. 69
SVT Features............................................................... 71
Field of View............................................................... 81
2.5 Abnormal Operations.............................................. 82
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 82
SVT Troubleshooting.................................................... 83
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 83
SVT Unusual Attitudes.................................................. 84
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
3.1 EIS Display................................................................ 86
3.2 Engine Page.............................................................. 88
3.3 Reversionary Mode.................................................. 90
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Overview................................................................... 91
PFD Controls and Frequency Display.............................. 92
GMA 1347 Audio Panel Controls................................... 94
COM Operation........................................................ 96
COM TUNING BOXES................................................... 96
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................... 97
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency................................... 97
Auto-tuning from the MFD........................................... 98
Frequency Spacing..................................................... 100
NAV Operation....................................................... 101
NAV Tuning Boxes..................................................... 101
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 102
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 102
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD................ 103
Auto-tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation.. 104
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 105
ADF/DME Tuning....................................................... 106
GTX 335/345 Mode S Transponder....................... 110
Transponder Controls................................................. 110
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 111
IDENT Function......................................................... 113
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions........................ 114
Power-Up.................................................................. 114
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 114
Speaker.................................................................... 114
Intercom................................................................... 114
Passenger Address (PA) System................................... 117
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 117
Split COM Operation.................................................. 118
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 119
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure.......................... 120
4.7 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 121
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 121
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 121
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation.................................. 121
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Introduction............................................................ 123
Navigation Status Box and Data Bar............................ 125
Using Map Displays............................................... 127
Map Orientation........................................................ 127
Map Range............................................................... 129
Map Panning............................................................. 131
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 133
Topography............................................................... 134
Map Symbols............................................................ 136
Airways.................................................................... 141
Additional Navigation Map Items................................ 143
Waypoints............................................................... 146
Airports.................................................................... 147
Intersections............................................................. 154
NDBs........................................................................ 156
VORs........................................................................ 158
VRPs........................................................................ 160
User Waypoints......................................................... 162
Airspaces................................................................. 167
Direct-to-Navigation ............................................ 171
Flight Planning....................................................... 176
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 177
Flight Plan Import/Export........................................... 180
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 187
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 188
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 193
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 196
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 199
Parallel Track............................................................. 200
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 202
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 202
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 203
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 204
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 204
5.7 Vertical Navigation................................................ 209
Altitude Constraints................................................... 210
Vertical Situation Display (VSD)................................... 214
5.8 Procedures.............................................................. 217
Departures................................................................ 219
Arrivals .................................................................... 222
Approaches .............................................................. 224
5.9 Trip Planning........................................................... 231
Trip Planning............................................................. 231
5.10 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 235
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Data Link Weather................................................. 238
Activating Data Link Weather Services......................... 238
Weather Product Age................................................. 240
Displaying Data Link Weather Products........................ 242
Weather Product Overview......................................... 251
FIS-B Weather Status................................................. 283
Stormscope Lightning Detection System............ 285
Using the Stormscope Page........................................ 285
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map............ 287
Terrain Displays...................................................... 289
Relative Terrain Symbology......................................... 290
Terrain Page.............................................................. 294
Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B Alerting Displays.................... 295
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance............................. 299
Additional TAWS-B Alerting........................................ 300
System Status............................................................ 301
Vertical Situation Display (VSD) Terrain.............. 304
VSD Display.............................................................. 304
Track Mode Boundary................................................ 306
Traffic Information Service (TIS)........................... 308
Displaying Traffic Data............................................... 309
Traffic Map Page........................................................ 310
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 311
System Status............................................................ 313
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
6.6 TAS Traffic................................................................ 315
Theory of Operation................................................... 316
TAS Alerts................................................................. 319
System Test............................................................... 320
Operation................................................................. 321
6.7 ADS-B Traffic........................................................... 327
ADS-B System Overview............................................. 327
ADS-B with TAS......................................................... 329
Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting.................... 329
Airborne and Surface Applications............................... 331
Traffic Description...................................................... 333
Operation................................................................. 333
ADS-B System Status................................................. 339
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts................................................ 379
CAS Message Prioritization......................................... 380
CAS Annunciations.................................................... 382
System Messages...................................................... 383
System Message Advisories........................................ 384
Database Management................................................... 395
Loading Updated Databases....................................... 395
Magnetic Field Variation Database Update................... 402
Garmin Aviation Glossary............................................... 403
Frequently Asked Questions........................................... 413
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 S-TEC Fifty Five X Autopilot (Optional)............... 343
Flight Director Mode Annunciation.............................. 343
INDEX
Index ................................................................................... I-1
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
Miscellaneous Map Symbols.......................................... 417
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SafeTaxi................................................................... 346
Charts...................................................................... 349
ChartView................................................................. 350
FliteCharts................................................................ 358
IFR/VFR Charts.......................................................... 363
Airport Directory........................................................ 366
Database Cycle number and revisions................ 367
Cycle Number and Revision........................................ 367
SiriusXM Radio Entertainment............................. 369
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 369
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 370
Flight Data Logging............................................... 373
Electronic Checklists.............................................. 375
Abnormal Operation.............................................. 377
SiriusXM Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting............... 377
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
Blank Page
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section provides an overview of the G950 NXi Integrated Avionics System as installed in the Tecnam
P2006T. The system presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication, and identification
information to the pilot through large-format displays.
EIS
LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
The system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDU 1050 (2) – The GDUs are configured as a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a Multi Function Display
(MFD). Both feature 10.4-inch backlit LED screens with 1024 x 768 high resolution. The displays
communicate with each other through a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each display is
also paired with an Ethernet connection to an IAU.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GIA 63W (2) – Functions as the main communication hub, linking LRUs to the PFD and MFD. Each
GIA 63W contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD) and system
integration microprocessors. Each GIA 63W is paired with the PFD and MFD via an HSDB connection. The
GIA 63Ws are not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GDC 72 (1) – The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system and outside air
temperature (OAT) probe. The ADC provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information
to the system, and it communicates with the primary IAU, displays, and AHRS using an ARINC 429 digital
interface.
AFCS
• GRS 79 (1) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 to both PFDs and the primary IAU. The AHRS contains advanced sensors
(including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field
information, with the ADC to obtain air data, and with both IAUs to obtain GPS information. AHRS operation
is discussed later in this Section.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GEA 71 (2) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates
with both GIAs using an RS-485 digital interface.
• GMU 44 (1) – Measures local magnetic field. Data is sent to the GRS unit for processing to determine aircraft
magnetic heading. The GMU 44 receives power directly from the GRS unit and communicates with the
GRS unit using an RS-485 digital interface.
APPENDICES
• GMA 1347 (1) – Integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom system and marker beacon controls. This
unit also enables the manual control of the display reversionary mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP button) and
communicates with both GIA 63Ws, using an RS-232 digital interface.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
• GTX 335R (Standard)/GTX 345R (Alternate) (1) – The GTX 335R solid-state transponder provides Modes A,
C, S and ADS-B Out capability. As an alternative transponder, the GTX 345R provides the same capabilities,
plus an ADS-B In capability. The transponder can be controlled from the PFD, and it communicates with the
both GIA 63Ws through an RS-232 digital interface.
1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Flight Stream 510 (1) (Optional) – Provides wireless Bluetooth® connectivity between a compatible tablet/
mobile device and the avionics system.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDL 69A SXM (1) (Optional) – A satellite radio receiver that provides data link weather information to the
MFD and PFD map. The GDL 69A SXM communicates with the MFD via an HSDB connection. Subscriptions
to the SiriusXM Weather or SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are required to enable the GDL 69A SXM
capability.
EIS
• GTS 800 (1) (Optional) – The GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) uses active interrogations of Mode
S and Mode C transponders to provide traffic information to the pilot independent of the air traffic control
system.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs and optional equipment. The system is capable of interfacing
with the following optional equipment:
• GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver
• RA 3502 ADF Receiver manufactured by Becker
• Flight Stream 510 Wireless Bluetooth®
Gateway
• TAS600 Traffic Advisory System manufactured
by Avidyne
• GTX 345R Transponder ADS-B In/Out
• WX-500 Stormscope Lightning Sensor
manufactured by L-3
• GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System
• KN 63 DME manufactured by Honeywell
• S-TEC 55 Autopilot manufactured by Genesys
Aerosystems Group, Inc.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: For information on the additional equipment shown in Figure 1-1, consult the applicable optional
interface user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this
additional equipment.
NOTE: For information on non-Garmin equipment, consult the applicable optional interface user’s guide.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this additional equipment.
2
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GTS 800
(Traffic Advisory
System)
GDL 69A SXM
(XM Weather/
Audio Datalink)
#2
GDU 1050
(MFD)
FlightStream
510
(Wireless
Bluetooth
Gateway)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GMA 1347
(Audio Panel)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
#1
GDU 1050
(PFD)
GDC 72 (Air Data
Computer)
EIS
GRS 79
(AHRS)
GMU 44
(Magnetometer)
#2 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GTX 345R
Or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
#1 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
GTX 335R
(Transponder)
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC
#1 GEA 71 (Engine
& Airframe I/F)
#2 GEA 71 (Engine
& Airframe I/F)
G/S
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC
G/S
S-TEC 55X
(AFCS)
Flight
Director
AFCS
Flight
Director
VHF COM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VHF COM
TAS600
(Traffic Advisory)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WX-500 Stormscope (Lightning
Sensor)
RA 3502
(ADF)
Garmin Equipment
Non-Garmin Equipment
Optional
Garmin Equipment
APPENDICES
KN 63
(DME)
Optional
Non-Garmin Equipment
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
Figure 1-1 System (LRU Configuration)
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Audio Panel (GMA 1347) is described in the CNS & Audio Panel section.
The system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and audio panel. The controls for the PFD and
MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
EIS
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
17
10
13
11
14
12
15
16
INDEX
Figure 1-2 PFD/MFD Controls
4
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1 NAV VOL/ID Knob
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a percentage)
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio ON/OFF
2 NAV Frequency Trans- Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies
fer Key
3 NAV Knob
Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2
4 Heading Knob
9
12 CLR Key
(DFLT MAP)
13 MENU Key
15 ENT Key
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making setting
changes
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
Validates/confirms menu selection or data entry
APPENDICES
14 PROC Key
Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier, chosen from the
active route)
Displays flight plan information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11 FPL Key
)
AFCS
10 Direct-to Key (
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6
EIS
5
Turn to manually select a heading. When operating in Heading Select mode, this knob provides the heading reference to the flight director.
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the HSI and synchronize the Selected Heading to the current heading
Turn to change map range
Joystick
Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning
Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting
CRS/BARO Knob
Turn the small knob to set the pilot-selected course on the HSI when the VOR1, VOR2, or
OBS/SUSP mode is selected. Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected
VOR. The pilot-selected course provides course reference to the pilot-side flight director
when operating in Navigation and Approach modes.
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active waypoint/
station.
Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz).
COM Knob
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between COM1 and COM2.
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).
Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies.
COM Frequency
Transfer Key (EMERG) Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into
the active frequency field.
COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM Frequency
Box).
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON/OFF.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
16 FMS Knob
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF.
(Flight Management Data Entry: With cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large knob moves
cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor location).
System Knob)
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar appears,
indicating more items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll through the list.
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a page
group; small knob selects a specific page from the group).
17 ALT Knob
Sets the selected altitude in the Selected Altitude Box (the large knob selects the thousands,
the small knob selects the hundreds). In addition to providing the standard system altitude
alerter function, selected altitude provides an altitude setting for the Altitude Capture/Hold
mode of the AFCS.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GDU 1050 data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database
and system software updates. Also, flight plans may be imported or exported from an SD card in the MFD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel. To remove, gently press on the SD card to release the
spring latch and eject the card.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Inserting and Removing an SD card
INDEX
APPENDICES
SD Card Slots
Figure 1-3 PFD/MFD Display Bezel SD Card Slots
6
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses powering up the system, normal and reversionary display operation, system status, AHRS
modes of operation, and GPS receiver operation.
SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
EIS
NOTE: See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for specific procedures concerning avionics power
application and emergency power supply operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical busses.
The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that
exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, and external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When powering up the system, test annunciations are displayed and key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the audio panel and the display bezels. On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize
and an alignment message is displayed. All system annunciations should disappear typically within one minute
of power-up.
When the MFD powers up, the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
• Navigation database name and effective dates
• Airport Directory name and effective dates
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information
• IFR/VFR charts database information (optional)
• Crew Profile
• Copyright
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System version
• Checklist File
• Land database name and version
• Safe Taxi database name and effective dates
• Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and effective dates
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted
to continue.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
NORMAL OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD (see Section 1.5). In
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
reversionary mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-4 System Normal Operation
8
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
REVERSIONARY MODE
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices for
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
further information regarding system-specific alerts.
In the event of a display failure, the system can be manually switched to reversionary (backup) mode (all
remaining displays enter reversionary mode). In reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented
on the remaining display(s) in the same format as in normal operating mode.
EIS
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to the Figure below), and the NAV and COM functions provided
to the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reversionary mode may be manually activated by pressing the Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP Button.
Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.
NAV1 and COM1 Flagged Invalid (provided by the failed PFD)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
DISPLAY BACKUP Button
Manually Activates/Deactivates Reversionary Mode on All Displays
Figure 1-5 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
9
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as system equipment begins to initialize. All windows
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red or amber “X” is typically displayed on windows associated
with the failed data (refer to Table 1-1 for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs). Refer to the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
EIS
The status of detected LRUs can be checked on the Aux - System Status Page. Active LRUs are indicated by
green check marks; failed by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin-authorized
dealer informed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Viewing LRU information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the LRU Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
NOTE: Refer to the POH for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
10
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Comment
System Annunciation
Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.
Occurs when the AHRS enters
alignment mode outside the
normal initialization period.
Comment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from the AHRS.
Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
AHRS.
EIS
Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
AHRS.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Display system is not receiving
valid heading input from the
AHRS or magnetometer.
AHRS calibration incomplete or
configuration module failure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the AHRS.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use. Note that
AHRS utilizes GPS inputs
during normal operation.
AHRS operation may be
degraded if GPS signals are not
present (see POH).
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Annunciation
AFCS
Display system is not receiving
valid OAT information from the
AHRS.
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
A red or amber ‘X’ through
any other display field (such as
Other Various Red/Amber
engine instrumentation fields)
X Indications
indicates that the field is not
receiving valid data.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 1-1 System Annunciations
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks
and failed LRUs are indicated by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin dealer
informed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-6 Example System Status Page
The LRU and ARFRM Softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU Information or
Airframe Window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.
AFCS
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label annunciator turns green indicting the softkey is selected) places the
cursor in the database window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the database window. Pressing the softkey a third time will change the softkey label back to MFD1
DB. MFD database information is displayed again in the database window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The ANN Test Softkey, when selected, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
APPENDICES
In addition to using internal sensors, the AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air data
to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic field
measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air data
information for attitude determination. Three AHRS modes of operation are available and depend upon the
combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor inputs is communicated
to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
INDEX
AHRS OPERATION
The AHRS corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic Field
Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field
and its annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every 5 years. See the Appendices for
12
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
information on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt you on startup when
an update is available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being
displayed to the pilot.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for specific AHRS system message information.
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while the AHRS is not operating normally can degrade AHRS accuracy.
Air Data
Available
AHRS Normal
Yes
Yes
Yes
AHRS no-Air Data
Yes
Yes
No
AHRS no-GPS
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
AHRS no-Mag Data
Yes
No
Yes
Attitude
Indicator
Valid Pitch/Roll/
Heading.
Valid Pitch/Roll.
Heading will coaston-gyros until it
becomes invalid.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AHRS no-GPS/noMag
Condition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Magnetometer
Data Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS Data
Available
EIS
AHRS Mode
No
No
AHRS coast-ongyros until invalid
No
Yes
No
AHRS no-Mag/
coast-on-gyros
until invalid
No
No
No
Invalid Pitch/Roll/
Heading.
APPENDICES
Yes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AHRS no-Mag/noAir Data
AFCS
Valid Pitch/Roll.
Invalid Heading.
Table 1-2 AHRS Operation
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GPS INPUT FAILURE
NOTE: In-flight initialization of AHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS data and at true
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed. Under these rare conditions, it
is possible for in-flight AHRS initialization to take an indefinite amount of time which would result in an
extended period of time where valid AHRS outputs are unavailable.
EIS
The system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the information
provided from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable, the AHRS seamlessly transitions to using the other GPS
receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of the use of the backup GPS path. If both GPS inputs fail, the
AHRS continues to operate in reversionary No-GPS mode so long as the air data and magnetometer inputs
are available and valid.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A failure of the air data input has no effect on AHRS output while operating in normal mode. A failure of
the air data input while the AHRS is operating in reversionary No-GPS mode results in invalid attitude and
heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red “X” flags).
MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to one of the reversionary No-Magnetometer modes
and continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is airborne, the heading output
on the PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a red “X”).
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
Each GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the Aux - GPS Status Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired a SBAS signal. While
the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to
have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS
receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
INDEX
APPENDICES
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Messages Window on the PFD.
If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
14
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Satellite Signal
Information Status
GPS Receiver
Status
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
EGNOS, MSAS
and WAAS
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Satellite Signal
Strength Bars
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS Selection RAIM Softkey
Softkeys
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SBAS Softkey Selected
Figure 1-7 GPS Status Page (RAIM or SBAS Selected)
The GPS Status Page provides the following information:
• Constellation
AFCS
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
• Satellite Status
APPENDICES
This box provides information regarding signal status. The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using
Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit
(HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual
position has 95% probability of laying. EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
INDEX
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to each
other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM, measures
of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and vertical accuracy
values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GPS Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active GPS
receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is in the process
of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data (collected continuously
from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be in view. “Acquiring” is
indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired for computing a solution.
EIS
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates “Inactive”. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates “Active”.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.4 for information on navigating MFD
page groups).
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) To change the selected GPS receiver:
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
• RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) Prediction (RAIM Softkey is pressed)
AFCS
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach
may be outside the SBAS coverage area, and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended
approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0 nm for
terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight,
RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
APPENDICES
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
INDEX
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by the
messages, “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available when
crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
16
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The system RAIM prediction capability does not meet all RAIM prediction requirements. Reference
the RAIM/Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) Prediction Tool at flygarmin.com as required.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan, Nearest, Recent, or User waypoints, if
required.
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The system automatically fills in the
identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
AFCS
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• ‘RAIM Not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
Predicting RAIM availability at present position:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM Not Available’ is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
EIS
• SBAS Selection (SBAS Softkey is selected)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage area, it may
be desirable to disable EGNOS, WAAS or MSAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the SBAS
Field in the GPS Status Box indicates Disabled. There may be a small delay for the GPS Status Box to be updated
upon WAAS and MSAS enabling/disabling.
Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
• GPS Satellite Signal Strengths
AFCS
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed for
each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below each bar.
The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Cyan bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
APPENDICES
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
INDEX
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
18
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.4 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Selection softkeys are located along the bottom of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey
level previously selected. The bezel keys below the softkey labels can be used to select the appropriate softkey.
There are three types of softkeys. One selects a simple on/off state, indicated by an annunciator on the softkey
label displayed as green (on) or gray (off). The next type of softkey selects among several options, indicated by
the softkey label changing (with the exception of the Map Range keys) to reflect the name of the chosen option.
The last type of softkey, when pressed displays another set of softkeys available for the selected function. Also,
these softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity. When a softkey function is disabled,
the softkey label is subdued (dimmed).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkey On Softkey Subdued
Softkey Names
(displayed)
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (press)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-8 Softkeys (First-Level PFD Configuration)
PFD SOFTKEYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PFD softkeys provide control over the PFD display and some flight management functions, including
GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic, and weather (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a Back Softkey which can be
pressed to return to the previous level. If new messages remain after acknowledgement, the Messages Softkey
will show “Message” in black text with a white background. The Messages Softkey is visible in all softkey
levels. For the top level softkeys and the transponder (XPDR) levels, the Ident Softkey remains visible.
Level 2
CAS i
Level 4
Description
Displays the scroll keys. Only displayed when the number of CAS
messages exceeds the capacity of the display window.
Scroll up CAS messages (Accessible only when the CAS Softkey is
displayed).
Scroll down CAS messages (Accessible only when the CAS Softkey
is displayed).
APPENDICES
CAS h
Level 3
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Level 1
CAS
AFCS
The following table describes PFD Softkey functions. Softkeys which display another set of softkeys are
indicated in the table by showing the given set as an increased level. For example, the Map/HSI softkey is
shown in the Level 1 column. When pressed, the Map/HSI softkey will display another set of softkeys and
these softkeys are explained in the Level 2 column. If a softkey on Level 2 provides yet another set of softkey
functions, those new available softkeys are then explained in the Level 3 column, etc.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Map/HSI
Layout
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Off
Inset Map
HSI Map
TFC Map
Wx LGND
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Detail
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic
Topo
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Rel Ter
NEXRAD
METAR
Lightning
AFCS
LTNG Off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Datalink
STRMSCP
TFC Map
PFD Opt
SVT
INDEX
APPENDICES
Pathways
Terrain
HDG LBL
APT Sign
Wind
20
Level 4
Description
Displays the PFD Map display settings softkeys.
Displays the PFD Map selection softkeys.
Removes the PFD map from display (Inset or Traffic).
Displays the Inset Map.
Displays the HSI Map.
Replaces the PFD Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Displays/removes the name of the selected data link weather provider
(SiriusXM) and the weather product icon and age box (for enabled
weather products).
Selects desired amount of map detail:
All (No Declutter): All map features visible
Detail 3: Declutters land data
Detail 2: Declutters land and SUA data
Detail 1: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
Displays traffic information on PFD Map.
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and
elevation scale on PFD Map.
Displays relative terrain information on the PFD Map.
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on PFD Map (subscription
optional).
Displays METAR information on PFD Map (subscription optional).
Adds/removes the display of SiriusXM lightning information on PFD Map.
(optional)
Disables lightning function on PFD Map. The softkey annunciator is green
when the lightning function is off.
Selects the data link weather source for the PFD Map.
Adds or removes the display of Stormscope information on the PFD Map.
The softkey annunciator is green when the function is on. When the
function is off, the annunciator is gray.
Replaces the PFD Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD options.
Displays additional SVT overlay softkeys. (optional)
Displays Pathway Boxes on the Synthetic Vision Display.
Enables synthetic terrain depiction.
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line.
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the
current aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport
is within approximately 9 nm.
Displays the wind option softkeys.
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
DME
Bearing 1
Meters
IN
HPA
OBS
XPDR
Displays the transponder selection softkeys.
Selects transponder Standby Mode (transponder does not reply to any
interrogations).
Standby
On
ALT
0-7
Ident
Ident
Ident
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
Tmr/Ref
APPENDICES
BKSP
Activates transponder (transponder replies to identification interrogations).
Altitude Reporting Mode (transponder replies to identification and altitude
interrogations).
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the U.S.A. only).
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7.
Use numbers to enter code.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Removes numbers entered, one at a time.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Displays Timer/References Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VFR
Code
AFCS
Cycles through FMS, NAV1, and NAV2 navigation modes on the CDI.
Displays the ADF/DME Tuning Window, allowing selection and tuning of
the ADF and DME (optional).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CDI
ADF/DME
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
STD Baro
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ALT Units
EIS
Bearing 2
Description
Wind information not displayed.
Headwind/Tailwind and crosswind components.
Wind direction arrow and speed.
Wind direction arrow with direction and speed.
Displays DME Information (optional).
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/
waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/frequency,
and Off.
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/
waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/frequency, and
Off.
Displays softkeys to select altitude unit parameters.
When enabled, displays altimeter in meters.
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury.
Press to display the BARO setting as hectopascals.
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric units are
selected).
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with
active leg). When OBS is on, the softkey annunciator is green.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Off
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Level 4
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest
Messages
or
Message
Level 4
Description
Displays Nearest Airports Window.
System generated messages cause the Messages Softkey label to change
from Messages to a flashing ‘Message’ label. Pressing the Message
Softkey opens the Messages Window, acknowledges the message, and the
softkey reverts to the ‘Messages’ label.
Table 1-3 PFD Softkeys
EIS
The following table provides an example of the MFD Softkey functions accessed from the Navigation Map
screen. Further information concerning softkeys providing more navigation and flight planning functions
may be found in the Flight Management Section. Terrain, traffic, and weather softkey descriptions may
be found in the Hazard Avoidance section. Further description of optional equipment and corresponding
softkey functions may be found in the Additional Features Section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The MFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and weather (optional). There are many softkey functions available on the MFD depending on the page group
and screen selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD SOFTKEYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Level 1
Engine
Level 2
Level 3
Map Opt
Traffic
Inset
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Off
VSD
INDEX
APPENDICES
TER
Description
Displays EIS - Engine Page; press again to exit page (see the EIS Section for more
information).
Displays second level Map Options softkeys
Displays traffic information on Navigation Map Page.
Displays inset window second level softkeys.
Removes VSD inset from Navigation Map Page.
Displays VSD profile information of terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical
track vector, and selected altitude.
Auto: Automatically displays either VSD profile information for active flight plan information or along current track with no
active flight plan.
FPL: Displays VSD profile information for active flight plan.
TRK: Displays VSD profile information along current track.
Displays terrain on the map; cycles through the following:
Off: No terrain information shown on MFD Map.
Topo: Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation scale on MFD Map.
REL: Displays relative terrain information on the MFD Map.
22
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
AWY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Checklist
AFCS
DP
STAR
APR
WX
NOTAM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CHRT Opt
Show Map
and Chart
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Charts
EIS
Detail
Description
Displays airways on the map; cycles through the following:
Off: No airways are displayed.
On: All airways are displayed.
LO: Only low altitude airways are displayed.
HI: Only high altitude airways are displayed.
Displays Stormscope information on Navigation Map (optional).
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on Navigation Map Page (optional).
Displays XM lightning information on Navigation Map Page (optional).
Displays METAR information on PFD Map (subscription optional).
Displays legends for the displayed XM Weather products (optional).
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through the following levels:
Detail All: All map features visible.
Detail-3: Declutters land data.
Detail-2: Declutters land and SUA data.
Detail-1: Removes everything except for the active flight plan.
When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts (optional).
Displays chart display settings softkeys (if available).
Show Map displays the applicable WPT Page information upon the map for the
chart currently selected. Chart displays the chart for the WPT Page that is currently
selected and returns to the Charts Level 2 Softkeys.
Pressing the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view
is on a different chart.
Displays departure procedure chart.
Displays standard terminal arrival procedure chart.
Displays approach procedure chart.
Displays weather information.
Displays NOTAM information for selected airport, when available.
When available, displays optional checklists.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
METAR
Legend
Level 3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
Table 1-4 MFD Navigation Map Page Softkeys
MENUS
APPENDICES
The system has a MENU Key that, when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This options list
allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently
displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to additional
submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display “No Options” when there are
no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all window/page group
operations are described in Section 1.2. Softkey selection does not display menus or submenus.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Navigating the Page Menu Window:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar appears to the right of the window
when the option list is longer than the window).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
EIS
4) The CLR Key may be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing the FMS Knob also
removes the displayed menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Options with
NRST Window
Displayed on PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Options with
FPL Window
Displayed on MFD
AFCS
Figure 1-9 Page Menu Examples
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MFD PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Information on the MFD is presented on pages grouped according to function. The page group and active
page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Data Bar. In the bottom right
corner of the screen, a page group window is displayed by turning either FMS Knob. The page group tabs are
displayed along the bottom of the window. The page titles are displayed in a list above the page group tabs. The
current page group and current page within the group are shown in cyan. For some of these pages (Airport/
Procedures/Weather Information, XM, Procedure Loading), the active title of the page changes while the page
name in the list remains the same.
24
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Page Title
Page Group
MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pages in
Current
Group
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Page Groups
Figure 1-10 Page Title and Page Groups
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
Page Group
Map (Map Page Group)
AFCS
There are several pages which may be selected by pressing the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page
(or from the page menu). In this case, the page title will change when a different page softkey is pressed, but
the page will remain the same (i.e. the Radio and Info softkeys show different page titles (“Aux - XM Radio”
and “Aux - XM Information” respective) within the same page, “XM Radio”.
Pages within Page Group
• Navigation Map
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• IFR/VFR Charts (optional)
• Traffic Map
• Stormscope® (service optional)
• Weather Data Link (service optional)
APPENDICES
• TAWS-B (service optional)
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Page Group
WPT (Waypoint Page Group)
Pages within Page Group
• Airport Information
- Airport Information (Info 1 Softkey)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Airport Directory Information (Info 2 Softkey)
- Departure Information (DP Softkey)
- Arrival Information (STAR Softkey)
- Approach Information (APR Softkey)
EIS
- Weather Information (optional) (WX Softkey)
- NOTAM Information (NOTAM Softkey)
• Intersection Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• NDB Information
• VOR Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VRP Information
AUX (Auxiliary Page Group)
• User WPT Information
• Trip Planning
• Utility
• GPS Status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System Setup 1/2
• XM Radio (service optional)
- XM Radio (Radio Softkey)
- XM Information (Info Softkey)
AFCS
• Maintenance WiFi Setup
• System Status
• ADS-B Status
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Connext Setup
• Databases
FPL (Flight Plan Page Group)
• Active Flight Plan
• Flight Plan Catalog
INDEX
APPENDICES
- Stored Flight Plan (New Softkey)
26
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Page Group
NRST (Nearest Page Group)
Pages within Page Group
• Nearest Airports
• Nearest Intersections
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Nearest NDB
• Nearest VOR
• Nearest VRP
• Nearest User WPTS
EIS (Engine Indication System)
EIS
• Nearest Frequencies
• Nearest Airspaces
• Engine
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 1-5 Page Group and Pages
PROCEDURE PAGES (PROC)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Procedure Pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu is
initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading Page is
opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages.
• Approach Loading
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Arrival Loading
• Departure Loading
SYSTEM SETTINGS
AFCS
System settings and crew profiles are managed from the System Setup Pages. Fields shown in cyan text may
be edited. Managing crew profiles and editing the system time format, display units, arrival alerts, and audio
voice format settings are discussed in this section. For other system settings, see the reference given to their
respective sections.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If desired, the default system settings may be restored at any time.
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the Defaults Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Restore Page Defaults’, and press the ENT Key.
The message ‘Restore Setup X Page Defaults?’ is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Configure System
Time
Fields shown in Cyan may
be edited
Change Display
Unit Settings
EIS
Configure settings
- GPS CDI
- Channel Spacing
- Flight Director Format
- Nearest Airport
Configure Alert
Settings
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Restore System Defaults
Crew Profile
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Choose active profile
- Create new profile
- Edit, rename, and delete
existing profile (other than
default profile)
- Import / Export profile to
SD Card
Select System Setup Page
AFCS
Figure 1-11 System Setup 1/2 Pages
- Setup 1
- Setup 2
CREW PROFILES
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
System settings may be saved under a crew profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected crew
profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Splash Screen. The system can store up to 25 profiles; the currently
active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at the top of
the System Setup Page in the box labeled “Crew Profile”. From here, crew profiles may be created, selected,
renamed, or deleted. Crew profiles may also be exported from the system to an SD card, or imported from
an SD card into the system.
Creating a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Create’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ Window is displayed.
28
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Crew profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or other previously created profile settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘Create’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile.
Or:
EIS
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Create & Activate’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘Cancel’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting an active profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Active’ profile Field in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the crew profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Rename’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ Window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) With ‘Rename’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Deleting a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ Window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
7) With ‘Delete’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Importing a profile from an SD card:
1) Insert an SD card containing the crew profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the Import Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) The system displays the ‘Crew Profile Importing’ Window with ‘Import’ highlighted. Turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight the ‘Profile Name’ Field, then scroll to the desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs,
then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘Import’ highlighted.
AFCS
5) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
‘Crew Profile Importing’ Window.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) If successful, the system displays ‘Crew profile import succeeded.’ in the Window below. With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page. The
imported profile becomes the active profile.
30
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Crew Profile Importing and Import
Results Window
Crew Profiles Available for Import
from SD Card
Import Successful
EIS
Figure 1-12 Crew Profile Import (Aux - System Setup Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Crew Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the Export Softkey. The system displays the ‘Crew Profile Exporting’ Window.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) To export the crew profile using the current selected profile, press the ENT Key with ‘Export’ highlighted. To
change the selected profile, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Profile Name’ Field, then scroll to the
desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key
with ‘Export’ highlighted.
AFCS
5) If the selected profile to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system
displays an ‘Overwrite existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on
the SD card with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key
to return to the ‘Crew Profile Exporting’ Window without exporting the profile.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) If successful, the window displays ‘Crew profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or
CLR Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Aux - System Setup 1 or 2’ Page.
APPENDICES
Export Successful
INDEX
Crew Profile Exporting Window, Enter
a Name to Use for Exported Profile
Figure 1-13 Crew Profile Export (Aux - System Setup Page)
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
CREW PROFILE IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
‘No crew profile files found.’
Displayed if the SD card does not have one or more valid pilot profile
filenames.
Displayed if the profile name matches the name of existing profile.
Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
‘Overwrite existing profile?’
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different
profile name.’
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
‘All available crew profiles in use. Delete a
profile before importing another.’
‘Crew profile import failed.’
‘Crew profile import succeeded.’
‘Overwrite existing file?’
‘Crew profile export failed.’
‘Crew profile export succeeded.’
Displayed if the maximum number for pilot profiles has been reached.
Displayed if the importing operation fails for any other reason.
Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
Displayed if the filename matches the name of an existing file on the SD card.
Displayed if the export operation fails.
Displayed if the export operation succeeds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DATE/TIME
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system obtains the current Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the Aux - GPS Status Page). System time (displayed in the lower right corner of
the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set by adding/
subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-14 System Time (UTC Format)
32
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Configuring the system time:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ Field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. If local time
format is selected, the ‘Time Offset’ Field is highlighted.
5) If necessary, use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm
selection.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-15 Date/Time Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DISPLAY UNITS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the system screens are listed on the System Setup Page.
The Navigation Angle reference, the Temperature units, and the Position units can be set from here.
EIS
Category
Navigation Angle
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Distance and Speed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude and Vertical
Speed
Temperature
Fuel and Fuel Flow**
AFCS
Weight**
Position
Settings
Affected Quantities
Magnetic (North)* Heading
True (North)
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Nautical
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges (some)
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK Fields (Navigation Data Bar)
Most distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
Feet*
All altitudes on MFD
Meters
All elevations on MFD
Celsius*
Fahrenheit
Gallons
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
Pounds*
N/A
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’* All positions
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
Exceptions
Airspeed Indicator
Altitude
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Map Page,
Terrain Proximity/TAWS Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
N/A
N/A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* Default setting
** Contact a Garmin-authorized service center to change this setting
Table 1-6 Display Units Settings (System Setup Page)
APPENDICES
Changing a display unit setting:
1) While on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Display Units’ Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired units.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
34
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
BARO TRANSITION ALERT
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion on setting the Baro Transition Alert.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPACE ALERTS
See the Flight Management section for a discussion on Airspace Alerts settings.
ARRIVAL ALERTS
EIS
The Arrival Alert Box on the System Setup 1 Page allows the Messages Window arrival alerts to be turned
“On/Off” and the alert trigger distance (up to 99.9 units) set for alerts in the Messages Window and the
PFD Navigation Status Box. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching
a user-specified distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight
plan). When Arrival Alerts is set to “On”, and the set distance is reached, an “Arrival at waypoint” message
is displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box, and a “WPT ARRIVAL - Arriving at waypoint - [xxxx]” is
displayed in the Messages Window. When Arrival Alerts is set to “Off”, only the PFD Navigation Status Box
message “Arriving at waypoint” is displayed, and it is displayed when the time to the final destination is
approximately ten seconds.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-16 Arrival Alert Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
Enabling/disabling the Window Arrival Alert:
AFCS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘On/Off’ Field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to turn the alert Off.
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Distance’ Field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT DIRECTOR
INDEX
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion setting the Flight Director format.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD DATA BAR FIELDS
See the Flight Management section for a discussion on the MFD Data Bar Fields settings.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS CDI
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion on setting the GPS CDI format.
COM CONFIGURATION
See the Audio Panel & CNS section for a discussion on the COM Configuration for channel spacing.
EIS
NEAREST AIRPORT
See the Flight Management section for a discussion on the Nearest Airport settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AUDIO ALERTS
The Audio Box on the System Setup 2 Page allows the audio alert voice setting (male or female).
Changing the audio alert voice:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Aux - System Setup 2 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Voice Field in the Audio Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Use the FMS Knob to select the desired voice setting and press the ENT Key.
SYSTEM UTILITIES
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the Aux - Utility
Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a record of the
time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum groundspeeds—are
displayed from the time of the last reset.
Figure 1-17 Utility Page
36
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TIMERS
The system timers available on the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page include:
• Stopwatch-like generic timers
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Total-time-in-flight timer
• Time since departure
EIS
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero on
a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits return
to zero.
Setting the generic timer:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (Up/Dn) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS ‘Generic’ Field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Start?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘Stop?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
AFCS
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Flight’ timer Field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled from
the System Setup Page.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Departure Time’ Field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the departure time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
AFCS
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are
reset to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
SCHEDULER
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The system’s Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Switch fuel
tanks”, “Overhaul”, etc.) in the Messages Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on a
specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically
reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, messages are retained
until deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty field within the ‘Scheduler’ Box.
38
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter text within the ‘Message’ Field to be displayed in the ‘Messages’ Window and press
the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the ‘Type’ Field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
EIS
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Message’ Field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
AFCS
Scheduler messages appear in the “Messages” Window on the PFD and cause the Messages Softkey label
to change to a flashing “Message” label. Pressing the Message Softkey opens the “Messages” Window and
acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the “Messages” label. Pressing the Messages
Softkey again removes the “Messages” Window from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from
the message queue.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 1-18 PFD Alerts Window
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD and MFD display backlighting, the PFD and MFD bezel, and the Audio Panel keys can be adjusted
manually in one of two ways:
• Using the individual dimmer bus control for the desired display, or
• Using the PFD Setup Menu and the following procedures. In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be
adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, adjustments can be made from any remaining displays.
Adjusting display backlighting:
EIS
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the ‘PFD Setup Menu’. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’. If
desired, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Auto’ next to ‘MFD Display’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the ‘PFD Setup Menu’. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’.
4) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD Display’ or ‘MFD Display’, as desired.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD Key’ or ‘MFD Key’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
INDEX
Figure 1-19 PFD Setup Menu
40
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight
instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display
during certain AFCS flight director modes.
EIS
The system increases pilot situational awareness by providing and easy-to-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD)
that features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and course deviation information. In
addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic, and weather information are also
presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
– Turn Rate Indicator
– True airspeed
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Airspeed awareness ranges
– Navigation source
– Vspeed reference bugs
– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Indicated airspeed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
– DME Information Window (optional)
• ADF/DME Tuning Window
• Altimeter, showing
• Transponder Mode, Code, and Ident/Reply
– Barometric setting
• References Window, showing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Trend vector
– Generic timer
– Selected altitude
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath
Indicators
• Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications
• Wind data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
– Barometric or temperature compensated
minimum descent altitude (MDA) or decision
height (DH)
AFCS
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
– Vspeed values
• ISA temperature deviation
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
15
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
16
14
13
1
EIS
12
11
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
10
3
9
4
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
6
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7
1
Airspeed Indicator
9
Turn Rate Indicator
2
True Airspeed
10
Barometric Altimeter Setting
3
Current Heading
11
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI)
12
Reference Altitude Bug
5
ISA Temperature Deviation
13
Altimeter
6
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
14
Reference Altitude
7
Softkeys
15
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Heading Bug
16
Attitude Indicator
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
42
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
10
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9
8
1
7
EIS
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
6
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
Selected Heading
2
Wind Data Box
3
Map/HSI
4
DME Window
5
Bearing Information Windows
6
7
Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height
Selected Course
9
Required Vertical Speed
Indicator
Vertical Deviation Indication
10
VNV Target Altitude
8
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
AFCS
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
EIS
9
8
1
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
6
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
4
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-3 Attitude Indicator
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚.
AFCS
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside
the turn) is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
INDEX
Figure 2-4 Slip/Skid Indication
44
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for airspeed criteria and Vspeed values.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed is
displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape
are shown at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are shown at intervals of 5 knots.
Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The indicated airspeed is
displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching never exceed speed (VNE), at which
point it turns red.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
Indicated
Airspeed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red
Pointer
at VNE
Vspeed
References
Low
Speed
Range
Speed
Ranges
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
True
Airspeed
Figure 2-5 Airspeed Indicator Ranges
AFCS
A color-coded (red, white, green, amber) speed range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors denote
flaps operating range, normal operating range, caution range, and never-exceed speed (VNE). A red range is also
present for low speed awareness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VNE,
the number in the indicated airspeed pointer changes to amber. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains
constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
VSpeeds (VA, VGlide, VR, VX, VY, and VLE) cannot be changed, however the speed bugs can be enabled/disabled
from the References Window. When active (on), the speed bugs are displayed at their respective locations to
the right of the airspeed scale.
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling and modifying Vspeed bugs:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey to show the References Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired vspeed bug value.
3) Turn the small FMS Knobs to adjust the value for the selected vspeed bug.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘On/Off’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ‘On’ or counterclockwise to ‘Off’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
References Window
References Menu
Figure 2-6 References Window and Menu
Vspeed bugs can be enabled/disabled individually, or collectively.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling or restoring default values to all vspeed bugs as a group:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘All References On’, ‘All References Off’, or ‘Restore Defaults.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
46
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTIMETER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
EIS
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude. Turn the large knob for 1000-ft increments, small knob for 100ft increments. If set to Metric mode, the large knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 500-meter increments; the
small knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 50-meter increments..
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If a Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value has been set, this altitude is also available for
the Selected Altitude.
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters. Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Reference
Altitude
(Meters)
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
AFCS
Indicated
Altitude
Altitude
Trend
Vector
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reference
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MDA/DH
Altitude
Bug
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
APPENDICES
Figure 2-7 Altimeter
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
INDEX
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the Meters Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent patch. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QHN altimeter setting for the height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
EIS
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the STD Baro Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
AFCS
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to alert the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the transition altitude in either direction. This is displayed by the flashing light blue barometric pressure setting
when crossing the transition altitude.
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘AUX - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Altitude’ in the ‘Baro Transition Alert’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert ‘Off’ or ‘On’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the altitude and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.
48
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only available on GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance when
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS is available.
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI; Figure 2-8) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels
at 1000 and 2000 fpm and minor tick marks every 500 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or
descent rate is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the
edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
EIS
A magenta chevron is displayed on the VSI to indicate the Required Vertical Speed for reaching a VNV target
altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has generated.
VERTICAL DEVIATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI; Figure 2-8) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight
Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more
information about VNV indications on the PFD.
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-9) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is
tuned in the active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on
a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in
place of the diamond.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
LNAV/VNAV, LP, LPV, LP+V). When one of these RNAV approaches is loaded into the flight plan, GPS is the
selected navigation source, and SBAS is used for vertical approach guidance, the Glidepath Indicator appears
as a magenta diamond (Figure 2-10). Full-scale deflection (two dots), is angular with upper and lower limits.
The upper limit is +/-492 feet (150 meters) and lower limits depend on approach service level.
LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V, and LP+V, is +/- 148 feet (45 meters).
•
LPV is +/- 49 feet (15 meters).
AFCS
•
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the
diamond.
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the
APPENDICES
active waypoint. Depending on procedure design, pilot action, and/or ATC clearance, the aircraft may be
centered on or above the glidepath when the Glidepath Indicator appears.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
49
VNV Target
Altitude
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
Vertical
Speed
Scale
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Glideslope
Indicator
Glidepath
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-8 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicator (VSI and VDI)
Figure 2-9 Glideslope Indicator
Figure 2-10 Glidepath Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in the table.
Top of Descent Message
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Phase of
Flight
INDEX
APPENDICES
FMS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Figure 2-11 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
50
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VNV Indication Removed
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
Criteria
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 2-1 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks are at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI. The HSI also
presents turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and selected navigation source information. The HSI is available
in two formats: a 360˚ compass rose and a 210˚ HSI Map. The HSI Map is mutually exclusive with the Inset
Maps.
EIS
The HSI with the HSI map disabled presents a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) with a Course Pointer, To/
From Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The Course Pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1,
and LOC) or a double line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/
From Indicator rotates with the Course Pointer and appears when the system is receiving the active NAVAID.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
15
14
13
1
12
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2
3
11
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
5
10
6
9
7
8
1
Turn Rate Indicator
9
To/From Indicator
2
Current Track Indicator
10
Flight Phase
3
Course Pointer
11
4
Navigation Source
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
12 Heading Bug
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
6
Lateral Deviation Scale
Turn Rate and Heading
Trend Vector
14 Current Heading
7
Rotating Compass Card
15
8
OBS Mode Active
Lubber Line
Figure 2-12 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)
INDEX
The HSI Map is a 210 ˚ expanded compass rose which also includes a navigation map with overlay capabilities
such as topographical, weather, traffic, and land information. The HSI Map contains a Course Pointer, a
combined To/From Indicator with a sliding deviation indicator, and a lateral deviation scale. Upon passing a
station, the To/From Indicator points to the tail of the aircraft. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI
on the HSI Map can appear either as an arrowhead (FMS, VOR, OBS) as a diamond (LOC). Refer to the Flight
Management Section for information about using HSI Map overlays.
52
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Lateral Deviation Scale
Flight Phase
Annunciation
Navigation Source
Course Pointer
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Course Deviation
Indicator and To/
From Indicator
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-13 HSI Map
Enabling/disabling the HSI Map on the PFD:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the HSI Map Softkey to enable the HSI Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
Press the Map Off Softkey to disable the HSI Map.
AFCS
For either HSI display format, a digital reading of the current heading appears above the rotating compass
card. A magenta diamond on the HSI represents the current track over the ground the aircraft is flying. To the
upper left of the HSI, the Selected Heading is shown in cyan, which corresponds to the cyan heading bug on the
compass rose. The Desired Track (DTK) is shown in magenta to the upper right of the HSI when the selected
navigation source is FMS and OBS Mode is not active. The Selected Course (CRS) is shown to the upper right
of the HSI when the selected navigation source is VOR or LOC and in magenta when the selected navigation
source is FMS with OBS Mode active.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
APPENDICES
The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted The cyan bug
on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station.
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Current Track Indicator
Current Heading
Selected Heading
Selected Course
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Heading Bug
Figure 2-14 Heading and Course Indications
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted.
EIS
The Current Track Indicator, represented by a magenta diamond on the HSI, is the current over the ground
track the aircraft is flying.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the AUX - System Setup 1 Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.
Figure 2-15 Heading and Course Indications (True)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Changing the navigation angle true/magnetic setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘AUX - System Setup 1‘ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Nav Angle’ in the ‘Display Units’ Box.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• True - References angles to true north (T)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Magnetic - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
54
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
Navigation
Source
Crosstrack
Error
EIS
Flight
Phase
Scale
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CDI
Figure 2-16 Course Deviation Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, FMS or VOR/LOC. The color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for FMS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by an FMSderived distance when coupled to the FMS. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with FMS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol. When
navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the same angular deviation as a mechanical CDI.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-17 Navigation Sources
APPENDICES
Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from FMS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan tuning box over the NAV1
standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
INDEX
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the cyan tuning box
over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to FMS.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
55
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
EIS
FMS
Selected
LOC1
Selected
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
VOR2
Selected
Pressing the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-18 Selecting a Navigation Source
The system automatically switches from FMS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when all of the following occur:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• The FMS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
FMS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until FMS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. FMS steering guidance is not
provided after the switch.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
On some ILS approaches where the glideslope intercept point is at or in close proximity to the fix prior to the
FAF, it is possible to be above the glideslope when the navigation source automatically switches from FMS to
LOC. The probability of this occurring varies based on air temperature.
Fix Prior to the FAF
INDEX
Glideslope Intercept Point
Figure 2-19 ILS Approach with Glideslope Intercept Point at Fix Prior to the FAF
56
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FMS CDI SCALING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When FMS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to amber. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, HDG LEG is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
The current FMS CDI scale setting is displayed as System CDI on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly
and the selected setting is displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
EIS
Changing the selected FMS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘AUX - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Format Allowed’ in the ‘GPS CDI’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
Terminal
Missed
Approach
AFCS
Departure
Depa
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CDI Full-scale Deflection
When set to Auto (default), the FMS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-20, Table 2-2).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-20 Automatic CDI Scaling
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
APPENDICES
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
INDEX
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA
• At 30 nm from the departure airport, the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (4.0 nm).
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
EIS
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (Figures 2-21 and 2-22). This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is activated or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
AFCS
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-21 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FAF
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2 nm
FAF
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
angle based
on database
information
course width
2 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
angle set
by system
350 ft
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
1.0 nm
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
Figure 2-22 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LPV and LP Approach CDI Scaling
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
APPENDICES
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
INDEX
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA
58
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (Figure 2-21)
LNAV + V
EIS
L/VNAV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
LPV
LP+V
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (Figure 2-22)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LP
MAPR
0.3 nm
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Approach
(Non-precision with
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Approach
(Non-precision with
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
(LP)
Missed Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to amber.
Table 2-2 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
AFCS
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current Active-to waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. OBS is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
APPENDICES
While OBS is enabled, a course line is drawn through the Active-to waypoint on the moving map. If
desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the FMS flight
plan returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight plan on the moving map retains the modified course line.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
59
GPS
Selected
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
Figure 2-23 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label changes
to indicate the suspension is active as shown in the following figure. Pressing the SUSP Softkey, deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
SUSP
Softkey
SUSP
Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-24 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
60
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURN RATE INDICATOR
Standard
Turn Rate
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than
4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Half Standard
Turn Rate
EIS
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 Degrees
per Second
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-25 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
Frequency
Bearing 1
Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Tuning Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV and FMS sources by
pressing the PFD Softkey then a BRG Softkey. The bearing pointers are cyan and are single-line (BRG1) or
double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information window to indicate the navigation source.
The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI by a white ring. Bearing
pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
Bearing 2
Pointer
Distance
AFCS
DME Information Window
Pointer
Icon
Bearing
Source
Bearing
Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
APPENDICES
Station
Pointer
Identifier
Icon
Bearing 1 Information Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Distance to
Bearing Source
Figure 2-26 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows (Figure 2-26) are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following
information:
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, FMS)
• Frequency (NAV)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Bearing source (NAV, FMS)
EIS
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency the bearing source and the bearing pointer is removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If FMS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed instead of a frequency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and NO DATA is displayed in the information window if
the NAV radio is not receiving a VOR station or if FMS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not
selected.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
4) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to ADF (note: ADF radio
installation is optional).
2) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window
with a NAV source.
3) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again to change the bearing source to FMS.
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again.
AFCS
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
NOTE: DME radio installation is optional.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window and shows the DME
label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance
is replaced by “–.– – NM”. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
APPENDICES
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the BRG1 Information Window.
INDEX
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
62
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
GENERIC TIMER
The generic timer can be accessed via softkeys on the PFD and allows for quick access for timing functions
(either counting up or down) for the pilot.
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (HH:MM:SS).
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key. The Up/Dn Field is now highlighted.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the UP/DOWN Window.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Up’ or ‘Dn’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Start?’ is now highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘Stop?’. If the timer is counting DOWN, it will start
counting UP after reaching zero.
9) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
10) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
11) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
AFCS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) and deviation from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) temperature
are displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD under normal conditions, or below the true airspeed in
Reversionary Display Mode. Both are displayed in degrees Celsius (°C).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-27 Outside Air Temperature (PFD)
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
63
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Changing temperature display units:
1) Select the ‘AUX - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD using the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Temperature’ Field in the Display Units Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight either ‘Celsius or Fahrenheit’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the
selection.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
EIS
WIND DATA
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways.
AFCS
Figure 2-28 Wind Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying wind data:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the Wind Softkey to display wind data to the left of the HSI.
3) Press one of the Option Softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
APPENDICES
• Option 1: Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
• Option 2: Wind direction arrow and speed
• Option 3: Wind direction arrow with headwind/tailwind and crosswind components
INDEX
4) To remove the window, press the Off Softkey.
64
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions related to flight instruments are displayed on the PFD.
Refer to Appendix A for more information on alerts and annunciations.
ALTITUDE ALERTING
Altitude Alerting provides the pilot with a visual alert when approaching the Selected Altitude. Whenever the
Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The following occur when approaching the Selected
Altitude:
EIS
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to black text on a cyan
background and flashes for five seconds.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude
changes to cyan text on a black background and flashes for five seconds.
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude) an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes to amber text on a black background and
flashes for five seconds.
Within 200 ft
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Within 1000 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-29 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: A Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. This annunciation is only
AFCS
available when TAWS-B alerting has been inhibited, is not available, or has failed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-amber LOW ALT annunciation appears to the top left of the Altimeter, flashes
for several seconds, then remains displayed until the condition is resolved.
Figure 2-30 Low Altitude Annunciation on PFD
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Altimeter. The outer marker (O)
reception is indicated in cyan, middle (M) in amber, and inner (I) in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS
Section for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Middle Marker
Inner Marker
EIS
Outer Marker
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altimeter
Figure 2-31 Marker Beacon Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH) can be set in
the References Window and is reset when the power is cycled. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to
the bottom left of the Altimeter. Once the altitude is within the range of the tape, a bug appears at the reference
altitude on the Altimeter. The following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA/DH:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the BARO MIN or COMP
MIN box appears with the altitude in cyan text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in cyan (or magenta for
COMP MIN) once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
AFCS
• Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text turn amber and the voice alert, “Minimums. Minimums”,
is heard.
Within 2500 ft
Within 100 ft
Altitude Reached
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
APPENDICES
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Figure 2-32 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
INDEX
Barometric
Minimum
Box
66
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the MDA.
If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA, once it reaches 50 feet above the MDA, alerting
is disabled. The function is reset when the power is cycled or a new approach is activated.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height and bug:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums Field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP.’ ‘OFF’ is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn
the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
EIS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
5) If TEMP COMP was selected, press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field and then enter
the temperature (-59˚C to 59˚C)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-33 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.4 GARMIN SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to the integrated flight deck. SVT
depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of
view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. The depicted imagery is derived from the
aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a 4.9 arc-second database of terrain, obstacles,
and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that the terrain elevation
contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the operation of SVT. Loss
of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to be disabled until the
required data is restored.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) is integrated within SVT to provide visual and auditory
alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts
are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
AFCS
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the TAWS terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
• Pathways
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
68
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-34 Synthetic Vision Imagery
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT OPERATION
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch attitude scale is reduced from 20
degrees up and down to 10 degrees up to 7.5 degrees down.
AFCS
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Opt Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SVT Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The softkeys
are labeled Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, and APT Sign. The Back Softkey returns to the previous level of
softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways, HDG LBL, and APT Sign Softkeys are only available when the Terrain Softkey is activated (gray
with black characters). After activating the Terrain Softkey, the Pathways, HDG LBL, and APT Sign softkeys
may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power is cycled, the last selected
state (on or off) of the Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, and APT Sign softkeys is remembered by the system.
APPENDICES
• Pathways Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• Terrain Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HDG LBL Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APT Sign Softkey enables airport signposts.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Activating and deactivating SVT:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Terrain Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the Terrain Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the Terrain Softkey.
4) Press the Pathways Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the Pathways Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the Terrain Softkey.
4) Press the HDG LBL Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HDG LBL Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Terrain Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) Press the APT Sign Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APT Sign Softkey.
70
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVT FEATURES
Flight
Path
Marker
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
Airport
Runway
Airplane
Symbol
EIS
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Horizon
Heading
Marks
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Synthetic
Terrain
Pathways Color
Matches CDI
Indicating Nav
Source
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SVT
Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-35 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
ZERO PITCH LINE
AFCS
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
HORIZON HEADING
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HDG LBL Softkey.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AIRPORT SIGNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-36 Airport Signs
72
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
EIS
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Wind
Vector
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-37 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
PATHWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the selected altitude or the VNV altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan.
EIS
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white[[ boxes corresponding to a white
line drawn on the PFD maps or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Programmed
Altitudes
INDEX
Figure 2-38 Programmed and Selected Altitude
74
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
Departure and Enroute
EIS
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.
Descent and Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During an approach, Pathways be can shown for the programmed descent, level transition flight, and
at the Selected Altitude within the approach segments. When an approach providing vertical guidance is
activated, the corresponding approach glideslope or glidepath will be displayed using a color corresponding
to the selected navigation source and conditions.
AFCS
White Pathways represent the next segment of the approach that is not yet active. Magenta Pathways
represent the active segment with GPS as the navigation source. Green Pathways indicate the ILS/LOC
navigation source. During the arrival/approach phases of flight, gray pathways indicate the anticipated
preview glidepath/glideslope. The gray Approach Preview Pathways will be displayed beginning at the start
of the segment leading to the FAF waypoint. With active approach vertical guidance, the selected altitude
will be displayed as a level gray Pathway if the Selected Altitude is lower than the glidepath/glideslope.
The gray Selected Altitude Preview Pathways are displayed until they converge with the green glideslope
or magenta glidepath pathways. If approach vertical guidance is not yet active, pathways at the Selected
Altitude will be displayed in magenta throughout the arrival/approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is the selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with the
LOC selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and
glideslope. VOR, LOC, BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are
displayed in magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or
VOR final approach courses are not displayed.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
EIS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-39 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
76
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Missed Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FAF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
by pathway
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
MAHP
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-40 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
Other
Runway
on Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Airport
Runway
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-41 Airport Runways
78
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
partial symbol.
EIS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVT
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVT display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
TERRAIN ALERTING
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the yellow terrain shading for a caution alert and the red shading for a warning alert
on the Inset Map and MFD Map displays. For more detailed information regarding Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B,
refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
Terrain
Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain
Caution
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Potential
Impact
Area
APPENDICES
Figure 2-42 Terrain Caution
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. When employing a TAWS-B system, unlike the Inset
map and MFD moving map display, obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn
of potential conflict with the aircraft’s flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert.
Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the
airspeed and altitude displays.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
PULL UP
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Potential
Impact
Area
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Potential
Impact
Point
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-43 Terrain Warning
80
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIELD OF VIEW
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/Disabling SVT Field of View on the Navigation Map:
1) While viewing the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Map Settings’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Map’ Group options to ‘Field of View’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and Field of View
turned on.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
AFCS
Figure 2-44 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.5 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur (Figure
2-45). Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
GPS LOI
Right of HSI
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
GPS INTEG OK Right of HSI
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS
Lower left of
DR
position to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan
aircraft symbol
waypoints
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Annunciation
Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
APPENDICES
Figure 2-45 Example HSI Annunciations
In Dead Reckoning Mode the CDI is removed from the display when GPS is the selected navigation source.
The following items on the PFD are then shown in amber:
• Current Track Bug
• Wind Data
INDEX
• Ground Speed
• Distances in the Bearing Information Windows
• GPS bearing pointers
82
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode as they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data, the
PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
• Attitude data
EIS
• Heading data
• GPS position data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• 4.9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• TAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
Nose High
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
Nose Low
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-46 Pitch Attitude Warnings
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from each PFD and their softkeys are disabled when the aircraft experiences
unusual attitudes:
83
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
• Traffic Annunciations
• System Time
• AFCS Annunciations
• PFD Setup Menu
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
• Inset Map
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• ISA temperature deviation
– References
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• Wind data
– Nearest Airports
• Selected Altitude
• Selected Heading readout
– Flight Plan
• VNV Target Altitude
• Selected Course readout
– Messages
• Ground Speed
• Transponder Status Box
– Procedures
• True Airspeed
SVT UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
During an excessively high pitch attitudes, the Synthetic terrain display (if enabled) uses a solid blue bar to
represent the sky, and a solid brown bare to represent the earth. During an excessively low pitch attitude, a
solid blue bar represents the sky, while the terrain continues to be displayed. This prevents losing sight of the
horizon during extreme pitch attitudes.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blue Band
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-47 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
84
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for limitations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Engine Indication System (EIS) displays critical engine, electrical, fuel, and other system parameters on the
left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations (Figure 3-1).
EIS
Display
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 3-1 Multi Function Display (Normal Operations)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; amber and red bands indicate caution
and warning, respectively. When unsafe operating conditions occur, displays, pointers and labels change color
corresponding to the level of the condition; warnings also flash. If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid
or unavailable, an amber “X” is shown across the instrument.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 EIS DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for engine operating limitations.
The Engine Display shows the dial gauge(s), horizontal bar indicators, and displays for critical engine and
airframe parameters.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS
1
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
5
AFCS
7
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6
8
9
APPENDICES
10
INDEX
Figure 3-2 EIS Display
86
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1 Engine Manifold Pressure
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine power
Indicator
5 Fuel Pressure
Displays fuel pressure in pounds per square inch (psi); pointers labeled L
and R indicate the fuel pressure in each side
6 Fuel Quantity
Displays fuel quantities in liters for the left (L) and right (R) fuel tanks;
pointers labeled L and R indicate the fuel quantity in each tank
7 Landing Gear
Displays landing gear position and status. White circles with the text
‘UP’ indicate landing gear up. Green circle with the text ‘DN’ indicates
landing gear down. Squares with amber Xs and indicate landing gear
in transition, and the ‘LANDING GEAR’ text will also flash on red and
white inverse video.
9 Pitch Trim
Displays pitch trim position along a slide bar
9 Rudder Trim
Displays rudder trim position along a slide bar
10 Flaps
Indicates flap positions ‘UP’, ‘T/O’, or ‘LND’ using a rotating pointer
AFCS
Displays engine oil temperature in degrees Celsius (°C); pointers labeled L
and R indicate the oil temperature for each engine
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4 Oil Temperature
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the engine in bar; pointers labeled L
and R indicate the oil pressure for each engine
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3 Oil Pressure
EIS
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2 Tachometer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
87
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.2 ENGINE PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Level 1
ENGINE
Pressing the ENGINE Softkey accesses the Engine Page, which displays all engine, fuel calculation, and electrical
information.
Level 2
Description
Displays full Engine Page; press again to return to the EIS Display and top-level
softkeys.
1 Trims and Flaps
Displays pitch trim position using a rotating pointer
Displays rudder trim position along a slide bar
Indicates flap positions ‘UP’, ‘T/O’, or ‘LND’ using a rotating pointer
2 Landing Gear
Displays landing gear position and status. White circles with the text ‘UP’
indicate landing gear up. Green circle with the text ‘DN’ indicates landing
gear down. Squares with amber Xs indicate landing gear in transition, and
the ‘LANDING GEAR’ text will also flash on red and white inverse video.
3 Engine Manifold Pressure
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine power
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for engine operating limitations.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Indicator
4 Tachometer
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute
5 Oil Pressure
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the engine in bar
6 Fuel Pressure
Displays fuel pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
7 Oil Temperature
Displays engine oil temperature in degrees Celsius (°C)
8 Fuel Quantity Indicator
Displays fuel quantities in liters for the left (L) and right (R) fuel tanks
9 Coolant Temperature
Displays coolant temperature in degrees Celsius (°C)
10
Displays the alternator currents in amperes and the essential and battery and
bus voltage
Electrical Group
Displays tachometer time for the left and right engines in hours
INDEX
11 Tach Time
88
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
5
6
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4
8
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3
2
EIS
9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
10
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
11
Figure 3-3 Engine Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.3 REVERSIONARY MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Reversionary Display mode, the operating display is configured to present PFD symbology with the EIS
Display (Figure 3-4). Refer to the System Overview for information about display Reversionary Mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
EIS
Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-4 Primary Flight Display (Reversionary Mode)
90
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Audio Panel
• Multifunction Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
system, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S Transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and a reply status.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
10
11
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
12
15
14
13
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and ADF/DME Tuning Window
92
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
6
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected and
decoded COM transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
7
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
8
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
9
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
10
ADF/DME Tuning Window – Displays ADF frequencies, volume setting, and modes, and DME tuning
selection. Display by pressing the optional ADF/DME Softkey.
11
ENT Key – Validates or confirms an Auto-tune selection.
12
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes and Auto-tune entries
when NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large
knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted
cursor location.
13
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.
14
ADF/DME Softkey – Displays the optional ADF/DME Tuning Window.
15
ALT Knob – Sets the selected altitude in the Selected Altitude Box (the large knob selects the thousands, the
small knob selects the hundreds). In addition to providing the standard system altitude alerter function, selected
altitude provides an altitude setting for the Altitude Capture/Hold mode of the AFCS.
APPENDICES
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Heading Knob – Turn to manually select a heading. When operating in Heading Select mode, this knob provides
the heading reference to the flight director. Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the HSI
and synchronize the Selected Heading to the current heading.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
13
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
18
19
20
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GMA 1347 AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
22
23
17
Volume Annunciation
Squelch Annunciation
24
AFCS
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
94
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Reserved for optional COM radio.
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker (if installed). COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard
on the speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in the P2006T.
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
to illuminate SQ. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded
block. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
20
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
21
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL
or SQ. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA Key
is pressed.
AFCS
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TEL – Selects and deselects telephone audio.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM 1/2 – Split COM operation key. When selected, the pilot uses the COM 1 transceiver and the copilot
uses COM 2.
EIS
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM3 – Reserved for optional COM radio.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM TUNING BOXES
1
2
3
4
5
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
6
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
Figure 4-3 COM Tuning Box Indications
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
Active Field – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the
left. An active COM frequency is displayed in green and indicates that the COM transceiver is selected
on the Audio Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white
indicate that no COM radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).
2
Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Tuning Box. Indicates which COM transceiver is selected for frequency transfer between the Standby and
Active fields.
3
Standby Field – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby frequencies are on
the right. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in
the tuning box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
4
Frequency Tuning Box – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Indicates which COM transceiver is to be tuned in the Standby Field.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
1
96
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
7
Frequency Spacing – The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or
8.33-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When
8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in
the complete 3040-channel list.
8
COM Volume – COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication
remains for two seconds after the change.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Transmit and Receive Indications – During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM
frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow. During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by
the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow.
EIS
6
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Squelch Indication – Indicates that Automatic Squelch is disabled. Automatic Squelch quiets
unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good sensitivity to weak COM
signals. When Automatic Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise
is heard over the headsets and speaker, if selected.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of each display.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
AFCS
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
APPENDICES
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
AFCS
Figure 4-4 Nearest Airports Window
Press the
Nearest
Softkey to
Open the
‘Nearest
Airports’
Window
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
APPENDICES
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
pressing the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key on either PFD to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
INDEX
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
98
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports Menu
Figure 4-5 Nearest Pages Menus
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Runway
Information
APPENDICES
Press ENT Key to load
frequency into PFD
COM Standby Field.
Cursor then advances
to the next frequency.
INDEX
Select INFO Softkey for
AIRPORT, RUNWAYS,
and FREQUENCIES
Windows
Figure 4-6 WPT – Airport Information Page
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FREQUENCY SPACING
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected,
all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
EIS
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup 1 Page of the Aux Page Group.
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the ‘Aux – System Setup 1’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While the COM Configuration Window is selected, the softkeys are blank.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
INDEX
Figure 4-7 AUX – System Setup Page
100
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV TUNING BOXES
3
4
5
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2
1
6
EIS
7
4
NAV Tuning Box – Moves between the upper and lower radio standby frequency fields with the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Indicates which NAV transceiver is to be tuned in the Standby Field. Moving the Frequency
Tuning Box is accomplished by pressing the NAV knob on the PFD.
5
VOR/LOC Morse Code Audio Indication – When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio,
a white ID replaces the Frequency Transfer Arrow to the left of the active NAV frequency. In order to
listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID
Knob turns on/off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV Tuning Box. To turn on/off both
NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing the small NAV Knob and
pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
6
Decoded Morse Code Station Identifier – The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code
station identifier that is received from the navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station
identifier can be accomplished by selecting the corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pressing
the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
7
NAV VOLUME – NAV radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication
remains for two seconds after the change.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
Active Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the
right. An active NAV frequency is displayed in green. The active NAV radio is selected by pressing the
CDI softkey on the PFD. Both active NAV frequencies appearing in white indicate that no NAV radio is
selected.
APPENDICES
3
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Tuning Box. Indicates which NAV transciever is selected for frequency transfer between the Standby and
Active fields.
AFCS
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby frequencies are on
the left. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in
the tuning box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-8 NAV Tuning Box Indications
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the selected NAV standby frequency is selected for tuning,
the Frequency Transfer Arrow is placed in the selected NAV Frequency Field, and the active NAV frequency
color changes to green.
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white and the previously selected NAV
standby frequency remains selected for tuning.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code station identifier that is received from the
navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station identifier is still required, and can be accomplished
by selecting the corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pressing the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
AFCS
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
or ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, ADF, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over
the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
APPENDICES
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
INDEX
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
102
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest VOR
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• WPT – Airport Information
• WPT – VOR Information
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
EIS
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) On the Nearest VOR and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV
frequency.
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the FMS Knob
to Scroll Through a
List of Frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
AFCS
Figure 4-9 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
103
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
EIS
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the ENT
Key to Load the
Frequency into the
NAV Standby Field.
Select the VOR Softkey to place
the cursor on the VOR Identifier
Select the FREQ Softkey to place
the cursor on the VOR Frequency
APPENDICES
Figure 4-11 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the ‘NRST – Nearest Airports’,
‘WPT – Airport Information’, ‘WPT – VOR Information’, and ‘NRST – Nearest Frequencies’ pages on the MFD
in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
104
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as
the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for
details.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
EIS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
off.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
AFCS
Figure 4-12 Marker Beacon Keys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
APPENDICES
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations. The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The MKR/MUTE Key
Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker beacon signal
is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while marker beacon
audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF/DME TUNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME and bearing information windows (ADF) and
using the ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic
and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the ADF/DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
The system tunes the ADF receiver (optional) and DME transceiver (optional). The ADF is tuned by entering
the frequency in the ADF standby frequency field of the ADF/DME Tuning Window. (The softkey may be
labeled ADF/DME, ADF, or DME, depending on installed equipment.)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following ADF/DME information is displayed in the ADF/DME Tuning Window:
• Active and standby ADF frequencies
• ADF receiver mode
• ADF receiver volume
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• DME tuning mode (DME transceiver pairing)
When the ADF/DME Tuning Window is displayed, the selection cursor is placed over the standby ADF
frequency field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turning the large FMS Knob moves the selection cursor through the various fields (standby ADF frequency,
ADF receiver mode, ADF radio volume, and DME tuning mode). Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates
the selection cursor in the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The ADF frequency is entered using the FMS Knob and
the ENT Key.
AFCS
Active ADF Frequency
Standby ADF Frequency
ADF Volume
ADF Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DME Tuning Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-13 ADF/DME Tuning Window
106
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF TUNING
ADF frequencies in the 190.0-kHz to 1799.5-kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field of
the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The system does not tune the ADF emergency frequency, 2182.0‑kHz.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Tuning an ADF frequency:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin data entry and change each digit.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next digit position.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete data entry for the standby frequency.
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Data in
the Standby ADF
Frequency Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete ADF
Frequency Entry
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Character
Figure 4-14 Entering ADF Standby Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the CLR Key before completing frequency entry cancels the frequency change and reverts back to
the previously entered frequency.
Pressing the CLR Key when the cursor is flashing, clears the frequency and replaces the standby field with
0000.0.
Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:
AFCS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
2) Press the ENT Key to complete the frequency transfer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the ENT
Key to Transfer
the ADF
Frequencies
APPENDICES
Figure 4-15 Transferring ADF Frequencies
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING ADF RECEIVER MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• ANT (Antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. Best mode for listening to NDB
audio.
The following modes can be selected: (In all modes NDB audio can be heard by selecting the ADF Key on
the Audio Panel.)
• ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station.
EIS
• ADF/BFO (ADF/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB
station and an audible tone confirms signal reception. This mode allows identification of the interrupted
carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• ANT/BFO (Antenna/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees
while an audible tone is provided when a signal is received. This mode also allows identification of the
interrupted carrier beacon stations and confirms signal reception.
Selecting an ADF receiver mode:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF mode field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired ADF receiver mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the Small FMS Knob
to Select the Mode
AFCS
Figure 4-16 Selecting ADF Receiver Mode
ADF receiver volume level can be adjusted in the tuning window from 0 to 100%. The default volume level
is set to 50%. The ADF volume level is the same for both Audio Panels.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting ADF receiver volume:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF volume field.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust volume as desired.
INDEX
Turn the Small FMS Knob
to Select the Volume
Figure 4-17 Adjusting ADF Receiver Volume
108
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME TUNING
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The system tunes the optional DME transceiver. The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF
NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
EIS
The DME Tuning Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. The DME
transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the DME Tuning Window. Pressing the DME
Softkey switches the DME Tuning Window on and off.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DME
Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-18 ADF/DME Tuning Window, DME Modes
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
AFCS
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the data entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
APPENDICES
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.4 GTX 335/345 MODE S TRANSPONDER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GTX 335 and GTX 345 (optional) Mode S Transponders provide Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation
and reply capabilities. Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
EIS
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
• Extended squitter – The extended squitter is transmitted periodically and contains information such as altitude
(barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft identification. The purpose of extended squitter is to provide
aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and other aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
AFCS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: Standby,
On, ALT, VFR, Code, Ident, Back.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the Code Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, Ident, BKSP, Back. The
digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters the transponder
code. If an error is made, pressing the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit.
Pressing the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
Pressing the Back Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the Back
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Pressing the Ident Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
INDEX
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
110
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 4-19 XPDR Softkeys (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Altitude Mode) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes). The
Standby, On, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
AFCS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the Standby Softkey. In Standby, the transponder
is powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted.. When Standby is
selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data
Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
Figure 4-20 Standby Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MANUAL ON MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the On Softkey. An On indication will appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting On mode enables transmission of transponder replies and
squitters, but transmissions will not include altitude information. The On indication and transponder code
in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and white while on the ground. When the
transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode
S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic systems of other aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
On-Ground On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airborne On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
Figure 4-21 On Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ALTITUDE MODE
AFCS
ALT Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ALT Softkey. When ALT mode is selected,
an ALT indication will appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting ALT mode enables
transmission of transponder replies and squitters. Transmissions will include pressure altitude information.
The ALT indication and transponder code in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and
white while on the ground. When the transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable
replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic
systems of other aircraft.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
On-Ground ALT Mode
Airborne ALT Mode
INDEX
Figure 4-22 Altitude Mode
112
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
REPLY STATUS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reply to Interrogation
Figure 4-23 Reply Indication
EIS
VFR CODE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VFR Code
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-24 VFR Code
IDENT FUNCTION
AFCS
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the Ident Softkey is inoperative.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the Ident Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The Ident Softkey
appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the Ident Softkey is pressed, a green Ident indication is
displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
After the Ident Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level softkeys
APPENDICES
Ident Indication
Select the Ident Softkey to
Initiate the ID Function
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
Figure 4-25 Ident Softkey and Indication
113
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
POWER-UP
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use with the system.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker (if installed). Pressing the SPKR Key selects and
deselects the cabin speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings
(autopilot, traffic, altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Volume can be adjusted though configuration.
Figure 4-26 Speaker Key
AFCS
INTERCOM
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Audio Panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) and a stereo music input for the pilot, copilot
and up to four passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and aircraft
radios.
INDEX
Figure 4-27 Intercom Controls
114
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
COPLT KEY
Annunciator
Pilot Hears
Copilot Hears
OFF
Selected radios; aural
alerts; pilot; copilot;
passengers; music
Selected radios; aural
alerts; pilot; copilot;
passengers; music
Selected radios; aural
alerts; pilot; copilot;
passengers; music
OFF
Selected radios; aural
alerts; pilot
Copilot;
passengers;
music
Copilot;
passengers;
music
OFF
ON
Selected radios;
aural alerts; pilot;
passengers; music
Copilot
Selected radios; aural
alerts; pilot; passengers;
music
ON
ON
Selected radios; aural
alerts; pilot; copilot
Selected radios; aural
alerts; pilot; copilot
Passengers;
music
ON
Passenger Hears
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
OFF
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PILOT KEY
Annunciator
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot
but can communicate with each other.
AFCS
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios, aural
alerts, and is able to communicate with everyone else.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume
and squelch. The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is
controlling. Pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by
the VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated.
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting.
EIS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic Squelch is on), the PILOT/PASS Knob
controls only the volume (pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls
either volume or squelch (selected by pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ
annunciation).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manual Squelch Annunciator;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch
Automatic/Manual Squelch
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot Volume or Manual
Squelch. Press to switch
between VOL and SQ. Turn
to adjust Squelch when SQ
Annunciation is lit, Volume
when VOL Annunciation is lit.
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
AFCS
Volume Annunciation
Squelch Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-28 Volume/Squelch Control
116
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker. When the PA
Key is pressed on the Audio Panel, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished, and the active COM frequency
changes to white, indicating that there is no COM selected. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA
announcements. The PA Annunciator flashes about once per second while the PTT is depressed.
EIS
PA Key is Selected on
the Audio Panel
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-29 PA Key Selected for Cabin Announcements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest
block.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. The PLAY Annunciator flashes to indicate when play is in progress. The PLAY Annunciator turns off
after the present memory block has finished playing.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
AFCS
Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each
subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-30 Play Key
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPLIT COM OPERATION
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. COM1 and COM2 frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the annunciator
is extinguished.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM1 Radio is Used
by the Pilot
AFCS
COM2 Radio is Used
by the Copilot
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-31 Split COM Operation
118
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
NOTE: Music1 and Music2 audio cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for the crew and passengers
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: Music1 and Music2. The pilot and
copilot hear Music1 and the passengers hear Music2. These inputs are compatible with popular portable
entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5-mm stereo phone jacks can be installed in
convenient locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged
into the Music1 or Music2 jacks.
EIS
The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input (see Table 4‑1).
CREW MUSIC
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Crew music (Music1) can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and the COPLT ICS
Annunciators are extinguished. Crew music can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT Annunciator is
illuminated and by the copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Music Muting
Crew music muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. Crew music is always
soft muted when an interruption occurs from these sources. Soft muting is the gradual return of music to
its original volume level. The time required for music volume to return to normal is between one-half and
four seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Music Muting Enable/Disable
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds switches crew music muting on and off.
When switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two
beeps indicate music muting is disabled. Crew music muting is reset (enabled) during power up.
AFCS
PASSENGER MUSIC
Passenger music (Music2) can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ is activated, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
EIS
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After powering up the system, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well as
prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot and
Copilot ICS
Isolation Keys
Pilot Volume
or Manual
Squelch
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
Squelch
Annunciation
AFCS
Volume
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-32 Audio Panel Controls
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
2) Verify that manual squelch is set to full open.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob fully clockwise. This will set the headset intercom audio level to max
volume (least amount of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
INDEX
6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually.
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
120
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation includes equipment failures of the system components and failure of associated equipment,
including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
EIS
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-33 Stuck Microphone Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
Figure 4-34 COM Tuning Failure
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio will not be available on the speaker.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
121
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Blank Page
122
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
EIS
The system is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the system.
The most prominent part of the system are the two full color displays: one Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
a Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. A brief description of the GPS navigation data on the PFD follows.
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)). L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels are
only available with SBAS.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map and HSI Map are small versions of the Navigation Map. The Inset Map is displayed in the lower
left corner of the PFD (lower right during reversionary mode), and the HSI Map is displayed in the center of
the HSI. The Inset Map and the HSI Map may each be referred to as the PFD Map. A PFD Map is displayed by
pressing the Map/HSI Softkey, pressing the Layout Softkey, then pressing either the Inset Map or HSI Map
Softkey. Pressing the Map Off Softkey removes the PFD Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data for the PFD Map can be reduced by pressing the Map/
HSI Softkey on the PFD, then pressing the Detail Softkey. The amount of displayed data for the Navigation Map
can be reduced by pressing the Detail Softkey on the MFD. The Navigation Map can be oriented three different
ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
AFCS
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
upper left corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
APPENDICES
The Direct To Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Current Track Indicator
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- References Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD Inset Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Mode
AFCS
HSI Map
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD HSI Map
124
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-3 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX AND DATA BAR
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-4 PFD Navigation Status Box
AFCS
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right to
021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD within 1
minute’)
The symbols used in the PFD Status Box are:
Description
Symbol
Description
Left Holding Pattern
Direct-to
Vector to Final
Right Procedure Turn
Right DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
Left Procedure Turn
Left DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
APPENDICES
Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Symbol
Right Holding Pattern
INDEX
Table 5-1 PFD Status Box Symbols
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
125
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Navigation Data Bar located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
BRG
DEST
DIS
DTG
DTK
END
ENR
ESA
ETA
ETE
FLT
FOB
FOD
GS
ISA
LDG
MSA
TAS
TKE
TRK
VSR
XTK
Bearing
Destination Airport Identifier
Distance
Distance to Go
Desired Track
Endurance
ETE to Final Destination
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
Flight Timer
Fuel on Board
Fuel over Destination
Ground Speed
Temperature at Standard Pressure
ETA at Final Destination
Minimum Safe Altitude
True Airspeed
Track Angle Error
Track
Vertical Speed Required
Cross-Track Error
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 5-2 MFD Data Bar Field Items
Figure 5-5 MFD Navigation Data Bar
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the ‘MFD Data Bar Fields’ Box
on the ‘Aux-System Setup 1’ Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Data Bar:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the ‘MFD Data Bar Fields’ Box.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list to select the desired data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the Defaults Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
126
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing
to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other
pertinent information)
• Fuel range ring
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Terrain
• Topography data
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.)
with names
• Map range
• Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Obstacle data
• Topography scale
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in the system to provide situational awareness in flight. Most system maps
can display the following information:
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
Flight Plan Pages (‘FPL’)
Direct To Window
PFD Maps
Procedure Loading Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All Map Group Pages (‘Map’)
All Waypoint Group Pages (‘WPT’)
Trip Planning Page (‘Aux’)
All Nearest Group Pages (‘NRST’)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP ORIENTATION
Maps are shown in one of three different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper left corner of the map.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-6 Map Orientation
• North up (North up) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
INDEX
• Track up (Track up) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Heading up (HDG up) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show
navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
EIS
1) With the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Settings
Selection
Figure 5-7 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Map Settings’ Window.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘Orientation’ Field.
Map Group Selection
Orientation Field
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
North Up Above Field
INDEX
Figure 5-8 Map Settings Menu Window - Map Group
128
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
7) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can be configured to switch automatically to a north up orientation when the map range reaches a
minimum range.
Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
EIS
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Highlight the ‘North Up Above’ Field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP RANGE
AFCS
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the upper left corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the system to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Auto Zoom On
APPENDICES
Figure 5-9 Map Range
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUTO ZOOM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on ‘Map Settings’ Window). Auto zoom is suspended while the map pointer is active.
EIS
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact areas If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map page capable of
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the
active waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD and MFD. Control of the ranges
at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times (set on the
‘Map Settings’ Window for the ‘Map’ Group). These settings determine the minimum and maximum distance
to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the
auto zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
AFCS
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the ‘Map Settings’ Window for the Map Group) determines how long
auto zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(1000 nm).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Auto Zoom’ On/Off Field, and select ‘Off’ or ‘On’ using the small FMS Knob.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Auto Zoom’ display selection field.
INDEX
7) Select ‘MFD’, ‘PFD’, or ‘All’ using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Max Look FWD’ Field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
130
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) Use the FMS Knobs to set the ‘Max Look FWD’ time. Press the ENT Key.
10) Repeat step 9 for ‘Min Look FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘Time Out’ (zero to 99 minutes).
11) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
EIS
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• View airspace and airway information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the panning function is selected by pushing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
Panning the map:
1) Push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Push the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
AFCS
Map Pointer Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Pointer
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Information about Point
of Interest
Map Pointer on
POI
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, VRP, or user waypoint:
1) With the desired map page displayed, push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer and place the Map Pointer
on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘WPT - <Waypoint> Information’ Page for the selected waypoint.
AFCS
3) Press the Go Back Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to return to the Navigation Map showing the selected
waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet above Mean Sea Level
(MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
Reviewing information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
APPENDICES
1) With the desired map page displayed, push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer and place the Map Pointer
on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace. (As the Map Pointer crosses the airspace boundary, the
boundary is highlighted and airspace information is shown.)
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Information’
Window for the selected airspace.
INDEX
4) Press the FMS Knob, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the ‘Information’ Window.
132
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map Page Menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ Field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
Measurement
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, push the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the ‘Page
Menu’ and press the ENT Key.
Pointer Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Measurement Line
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TOPOGRAPHY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures. Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable VSD Inset at the bottom of the Navigation
Map Page.
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
EIS
Navigation Map
Black Background
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Topographic Data
on VSD Inset
TOPO On
TOPO Off
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
Displaying/removing topographic data on all MFD pages displaying navigation maps:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Topo’ is shown on the softkey to display topographic data.
3) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data from the navigation map.
When topographic data is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
AFCS
Displaying/removing topographic data on the PFD Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey .
2) Press the Topo Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Topo Softkey again to remove topographic data from the PFD Map. When topographic data is
removed from the PFD Map, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
134
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Absolute Terrain On
Terrain Off
Figure 5-14 PFD Inset Map - Absolute Terrain Data
EIS
Displaying/removing topographic data using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ Field.
6) Select ‘Topo’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
NOTE: Since the PFD Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the PFD
AFCS
Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Settings pages (e.g., a setting of 100 nm
removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Map removes the same
item at 50 nm).
Selecting a topographical data range (Terrain Display):
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ range Field. Ranges are from 1 nm to 1000 nm.
6) To change the Terrain Display range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
INDEX
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and minimum/maximum displayed elevations.
EIS
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (Topo Scale):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group and select the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘Topo Scale’ Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
MAP SYMBOLS
AFCS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the Detail Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
Symbol
APPENDICES
User Waypoint
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
25
40
INDEX
Highways and Roads
136
Interstate Highway (Freeway)
50
400
International Highway (Freeway)
50
400
US Highway (National Highway)
15
150
State Highway (Local Highway)
2.5
100
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Symbol
Local Road (Local Road)
N/A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Land Symbols
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
7.5
25
Large City (> 200,000)
100
1000
Medium City (> 50,000)
Small City (> 5,000)
50
25
400
100
State/Province
400
1000
River/Lake
75
100
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
1
1000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Railroads (RAILROAD)
EIS
25
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4
Table 5-3 Land Symbol Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
Symbol
7.5
150
N/A
N/A
Intersection (INT)
25
40
Non-directional Beacon (NDB)
25
50
VOR
50
250
N/A
N/A
Visual Reporting Point (VRP)
25
1000
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
250
1000
VNAV Constraints
1000
1000
Runway Extension
Missed Approach Preview On/Off (Missed APR)
VOR Compass Rose On/Off
N/A
N/A
INDEX
5
APPENDICES
1.5
See Additional Features
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
150
AFCS
25
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Large Airport (Longest Runway ≥ 8100 ft)
Medium Airport (8100 ft > Longest Runway ≥ 5000 ft)
Small Airport (Longest Runway < 5000 ft)
(Medium Airport if it has a tower frequency)
Taxiways (SafeTaxi)
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
100
1000
50
400
Table 5-4 Aviation Symbol Information
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AIRSPACE SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the airspace menu:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspace Symbols
Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Smart Airspace On/Off
Airspace Altitude Labels (Airspace ALT LBL) On/Off
N/A
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
N/A
N/A
Class B Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
N/A
N/A
Class C Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor)
N/A
N/A
Class D Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling)
N/A
N/A
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
50
150
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
50
100
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
10
100
Alert/Prohibited/Restricted/Warning Areas (RESTRICTED)
50
100
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
50
250
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
50
250
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 5-5 Airspace Symbol Information
138
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYMBOL SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display land, aviation and airspace symbols. Symbol types (e.g. runway extensions,
railroads) can be removed individually. The range sets the maximum range at which items appear on the
display. For example, enabling “Runway Extension” displays a dashed line on the map extending from each
runway of an airport in the flight plan when the range is set at or below the value of the map settings option.
Setting up the ‘Land’, ‘Aviation’ or ‘Airspace’ group items:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
EIS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired setting (e.g. On/Off or maximum range).
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
MAP DECLUTTER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the Detail Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Decluttering the map:
Press the Detail Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey press, another level of map information is removed.
AFCS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key.
Decluttering the PFD Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the Detail Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The following table lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
Intersections
NDBs
VORs
VRPs
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
Detail 3
Detail 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Detail 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 5-6 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
140
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways
(Victor Airways or T-Routes) start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up to 18,000 feet mean sea
level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” or a “T” before the airway number.
High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes or Q-Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL. High Altitude Airways are designated with a “J” or a “Q” before the airway number.
EIS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Low Altitude
Airway
(T-Route)
High Altitude
Airway
(Q-Route)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-16 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
APPENDICES
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AWY Softkey
presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also be
programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the AWY Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AWY On).
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AWY LO).
4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AWY HI).
5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AWY Off).
Or:
EIS
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ On/Off Field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’ or ‘On’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Selecting an airway range (Low ALT Airways or High ALT Airways):
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ Group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ or ‘High ALT Airways’ range Field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
AFCS
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following items are configured on the airways menu:
APPENDICES
Airways Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Low Altitude Airways (V Routes and T Routes)
50
100
High Altitude Airways (J Routes and Q Routes)
50
100
INDEX
Table 5-7 Airways Symbol Information
142
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL NAVIGATION MAP ITEMS
Navigation maps can display some additional items. These items (e.g. track vector, wind vector, fuel range
ring, SVT field of view, and selected altitude intercept arc) can be displayed/removed individually.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting up additional ‘Map’ group items:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
If it is a data field, use the FMS Knob to select the range or time value.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
TRACK VECTOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector is a solid
cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable (30 sec, 60
sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track vector
shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings. It is always a straight line for the 2
min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Track Vector
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map - Track Vector
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
WIND VECTOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector
information is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind
speeds greater than or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
EIS
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Information pages.
FUEL RANGE RING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid amber circle.
Total Endurance Range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Time to Reserve Fuel
Range to Reserve Fuel
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
INDEX
APPENDICES
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of view. The
field of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This
is only available if SVT is installed on the aircraft.
144
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
EIS
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map - Field of View
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected
altitude. The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or descending.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
Intercept Arc
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.3 WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on autotuning.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the system. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the Spell’N’Find feature scrolls through the database,
displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to navigation
leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint pages.
Identifier Entry Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
AFCS
Waypoint Location
Figure 5-22 Waypoint Information Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a ‘Duplicate
Waypoints’ Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
146
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Identifier with
Duplicates
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Duplicate
Waypoints
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Duplicate Message
Figure 5-23 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRPORTS
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
The ‘Airport Information’ Page is the first page in ‘WPT’ page group and allows the pilot to view airport
information, load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures
that may be involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading
frequencies (auto-tuning). After engine startup, the ‘Airport Information Page’ defaults to the airport where the
aircraft is located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan
with multiple airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘Airport’, ‘Runways’, and ‘Frequencies’. For airports
with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the ‘Airport
Information’ Page by pressing the Info Softkey until ‘1’ is displayed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
EIS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport/Runway
Diagram
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-24 Airport Information Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled lighting)
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
Airport Information
Airport Directory
Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
Figure 5-25 Airport Directory Page Example
The airport directory information is viewed on the ‘Airport Directory’ Page by pressing the Info Softkey until
‘2’ is displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if available) on the ‘Airport
Directory’ Page:
148
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
• Notes: Airport Notes
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
• FBO:
Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
• Instrument
Approaches:
Published Approach, Freq.
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures
EIS
• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
• Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey), press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey) displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AFCS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Runways’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing a destination airport:
From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey) press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination
Airport’. The Destination Airport is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The airport ‘Frequencies’ Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-8 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display
(see the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
The system provides a Nearest Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The ‘Nearest Airports’ Window displays a list of
up to 25 of the nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they
are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “None Within 200nm” is displayed.
AFCS
Bearing/Distance to Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
APPENDICES
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
INDEX
Nearest Softkey
Figure 5-26 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
150
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the ENT Key while the Nearest Airports Window is shown displays the PFD ‘Airport Information’
Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing the ENT Key again returns to the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window with
the cursor on the next airport in the list. Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information
pages for all airports in the Nearest Airports list.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
Airport Information
Airport Information
EIS
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-27 Airport Information Window on PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the Nearest Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information Window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key moves
through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the Nearest Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
AFCS
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘Nearest Airports’,
‘Information’, ‘Runways’, ‘Frequencies’, and ‘Approaches’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to three frequencies,
and up to four approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
Nearest Airport
- Facility/City/Elevation
Runway Information
EIS
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Window Selection
Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-28 Nearest Airport Page
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST’ page group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Nearest Airports’ Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, ‘None Within 200nm’ is displayed.
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Nearest Airports’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports list
is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
152
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight
‘Select Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Runways’ Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel & CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
EIS
The ‘Nearest Airports’ Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 3000 feet (or meters) for runway length
and “Hard Only” for runway surface type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface and minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Runway Surface’ Field in the ‘Nearest Airport’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (Any, Hard Only, Hard/Soft, Water).
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Minimum Length’ Field in the ‘Nearest Airport’ Box.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
153
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
used to define the intersection.
EIS
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘Intersection’, ‘Information’, and ‘Nearest VOR’.
Intersection Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
Intersection Info
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Intersection
Figure 5-29 Intersection Information Page
AFCS
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the ‘WPT - Intersection Information’ Page displayed, enter an identifier in the ‘Intersection’ Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest Intersections’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest INT’ Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
154
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘Nearest INT’, ‘Information’, and ‘Reference VOR’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to 12 intersections are visible at a time. If there
are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that fact
is displayed.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
EIS
Intersection Information
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
Nearest
Intersection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Intersection Lat/Long
Reference VOR Info
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
Figure 5-30 Nearest Intersections Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NDBS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of the
currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled ‘NDB’,
‘Information’, ‘Frequency’, and ‘Nearest Airport’.
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-31 NDB Information Page
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in
conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
AFCS
Selecting an NDB:
1) With the ‘WPT - NDB Information’ Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which
it’s located in the ‘NDB’ Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest NDB’ Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
156
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘Nearest NDB’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to 12 NDBs are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the Information and Frequency Fields are dashed.
EIS
NDB Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NDB Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
Nearest NDB
NDB Frequency
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-32 Nearest NDB Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VORS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS navigation signals, or to
quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information cannot be viewed on the VOR Information
Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page
and if it includes only DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
EIS
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘Information’, ‘Frequency’, and ‘Nearest Airport’.
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
Selected VOR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airport Info
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
Figure 5-33 VOR Information Page
AFCS
The VOR classes used in the VOR Information Box are: Low Altitude, High Altitude, and Terminal.
Selecting a VOR:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the ‘WPT - VOR Information’ Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which
it’s located in the ‘VOR’ Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
158
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VOR’ Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VOR’ Box.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of the
surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three boxes
labeled ‘Nearest VOR’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’. The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to 12 VORs are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text indicating
that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information is dashed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
VOR Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
VOR Information
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR
VOR Frequency
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-34 Nearest VOR Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VRPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VRP Information Page is used to view information about visual reporting points (VRPs). In addition to
displaying a map of the currently selected VRP and surrounding area, the VRP Information Page displays VRP
information in two boxes labeled ‘VRP’ and ‘Information’’.
VRP Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Selected VRP
- VRP Name
EIS
VRP Information
- Country
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
- Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected VRP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-35 VRP Information Page
Selecting a VRP:
1) With the ‘WPT - VRP Information’ Page displayed, enter the identifier or the name of the VRP in the ‘VRP’ Box.
AFCS
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VRP’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VRP’ Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Nearest VRP Page can be used to quickly find a VRP close to the aircraft. In addition to displaying a
map of the surrounding area, the Nearest VRP Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VRPs in two
boxes labeled ‘Nearest VRP’ and ‘Information’. The list only includes VRPs that are within 200 nm.
160
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A white arrow before the VRP identifier indicates the selected VRP. Up to 12 VRPs are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no VRPs in the list, text indicating
that there are no nearest VRPs is displayed. If there are no nearest VRPs in the list, the information is dashed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VRP Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest VRP
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest VRP
VRP Information
- VRP Name
- Country
- Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-36 Nearest VRP Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
USER WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from
any map page (except PFD Maps, Aux-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from
an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or a latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has
been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power
down.
User Waypoint Info
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
User Waypoint
Comment
Reference Wpt/Info
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
Selected User
Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
User Waypoint List
- Identifier
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
# User Wpts Used
Figure 5-37 User Waypoint Information Page
AFCS
Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box using the large FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest User WPTS’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest User’ Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
162
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Nearest User Wpt List
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
EIS
User Waypoint Info
Selected User
Waypoint
- Comment
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reference Wpt Info
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
Figure 5-38 Nearest User Waypoint Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User WPT Information Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the New Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
AFCS
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary by moving the cursor to ‘Temporary’ and
selecting the ENT Key to check the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new user waypoint AAAAAA?’ is displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary by moving the cursor to ‘Temporary’ and
selecting the ENT Key to check the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Push the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page is displayed with the captured position.
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
AFCS
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
APPENDICES
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
INDEX
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs..
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
164
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary or normal by moving the cursor to
‘Temporary’ and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9) Press the Go Back Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
2) Select a user waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, if required, and press the ENT Key.
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Renaming user waypoints:
1) With the ‘WPTS - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a user waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’
Box. Press the Rename Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a new name.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
AFCS
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the
‘User Waypoint List’ Box, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the
‘User Waypoint List’ Box, then press the ENT Key.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint
information page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘Normal’ or ‘Temporary’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page.
EIS
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’
Box, or enter a waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Deleting a single user waypoint:
2) Press the MENU Key.
2) Press the Delete Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘YES’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’
Box, or enter a waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box.
2) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints.’
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
166
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.4 AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR). For
detailed information concerning TFRs, see the Hazard Avoidance Section.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Class B Airspace
Restricted Area
Class D Airspace
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Alert Area
Class C Airspace
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MOA (Military)
ADIZ
APPENDICES
Warning Area
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
Figure 5-39 Airspaces
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Displaying and removing airspace altitude labels:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airspace’ Group, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Airspace ALT LBL’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ to display labels and ‘Off’ to remove labels.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page (Setup 1 Softkey).
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Altitude Buffer’ Field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page (Setup 1 Softkey).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to turn the alert Off.
APPENDICES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the ‘Airspace’ Group in the ‘Map Settings’ Window.
Reference the Airspace Symbol Table for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol
used to define the airspace area.
INDEX
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying a map
of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in four boxes
labeled ‘Airspace Alerts’, ‘Airspace Agency’, ‘Vertical Limits’, and ‘Frequencies’.
168
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airspace Alerts Info
Airspace 1
Airspace 2
Airspace 3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
EIS
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Associated Frequencies
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Figure 5-40 Nearest Airspaces Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
Alerts and FREQ Softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airspaces’ Page.
2) Press the Messages Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
3) Select the desired airspace.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace
within 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
APPENDICES
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead – less than
10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less than 2 nm.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the PFD Messages Softkey displays the Messages Window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts
are displayed in the Messages Window:
Table 5-9 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Smart Airspace function de-emphasizes airspaces above or below the current aircraft altitude. The function
does not require the aircraft present position or flight path to enter the lateral boundaries of the airspace. If the
current aircraft altitude is within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace, the airspace boundary is
shown normally. If the current aircraft altitude is not within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace,
the airspace boundary is shown subdued.
Smart Airspace Off
Smart Airspace On
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-41 Smart Airspace
Turning smart airspace on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Group’ Box.
AFCS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Airspace’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Smart Airspace’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn smart airspace On or counterclockwise to turn smart airspace Off.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
170
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key, is quicker to use than a flight plan
when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The ‘Direct To’ Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Direct-to Point Info
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
Map of Selected Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Course
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
AFCS
Figure 5-42 Direct-to Window - MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Direct-to Point Info
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
EIS
Activation Command
Figure 5-43 Direct-to Window - PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the ‘Direct To’ Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed (with the active flight plan waypoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate?’ is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
AFCS
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the ‘Direct To’
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
INDEX
Figure 5-44 Waypoint Submenu
172
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD, or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Any Nearest, Recent or User waypoint can be selected as a direct-to destination in the ‘Direct To’ Window.
Selecting a Nearest, Recent or User waypoint as a direct-to destination:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Nearest, Recent or User waypoints.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The ‘Direct To’ Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to
navigation. If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active
flight plan waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page
defaults to the displayed waypoint.
APPENDICES
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
1) Press the Nearest Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports ‘Page on
the MFD and press the FMS Knob.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, push the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, VRP, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the Course Field (‘Course’) on the ‘Direct To’ Window.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
APPENDICES
2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
174
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the directto destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ Box altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
5) The cursor is now flashing in the ‘VNV’ Box offset distance field.
6) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to activate.
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the system consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The system allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type
Symbol
EIS
Active Course Leg*
Active Heading Leg*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Roll Steering Path*†
Course Leg in the current flight segment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course Leg not in the current flight segment
Heading Leg
Roll Steering Path †
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Future Roll Steering Path ‡
Turn Anticipation Arc
AFCS
* The active leg or path is the one currently being flown, and is shown in magenta.
† A roll steering path is a computed transition between two disconnected legs.
‡ A roll steering path in the flight plan that is beyond the next leg appears as a future roll steering path. When a future roll
steering path becomes the next leg in the flight plan, it appears as a roll steering path.
Table 5-10 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 100 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. Upon power up,
the previously active flight plan is retained and automatically repopulated if the aircraft position is at the origin
airport and the aircraft is on the ground. If, however, the aircraft is not at the origin, on the ground, or if more
than 12 hours have passed since the last active flight plan modification, the previously active flight plan is not
retained. One flight plan can be activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan
is overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
176
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
EIS
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Active FPL Waypoint List
AFCS
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Vertical Navigation Profile
Turn Anticipation
Arc
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
APPENDICES
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Vertical Deviation
Figure 5-45 Active Flight Plan Page
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight Plan Comment
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan
Waypoint List
EIS
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
Figure 5-46 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Catalog Contents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- # Used
- # Empty
Flight Plan List
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
AFCS
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Figure 5-47 Flight Plan Catalog Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The active flight plan is listed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Flight Plan Window
on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is shown on the
navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD, and are available
for activation (becomes the active flight plan).
APPENDICES
Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key. Press the small FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
2) Select the origin airport and runway.
INDEX
a) Highlight the field below the Origin header to enter the origin airport identifier using the FMS Knob.
178
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure
waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
3) Repeat step number 2 for the destination airport and runway.
4) Select the enroute waypoints.
EIS
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob (If the enroute header is selected, the
new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute waypoint or the dashes are selected, the new
waypoint will be placed ahead of the selected item).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint.
The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat step number 4 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor (if required).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) From the MFD, press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the New Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
4) Select the origin airport and runway.
a) Highlight the field below the Origin header to enter the origin airport identifier using the FMS Knob.
AFCS
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure
waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field highlighted.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
5) Repeat step number 4 for the destination airport and runway.
6) Select the enroute waypoints.
APPENDICES
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob (If the enroute header is selected, the
new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute waypoint or the dashes are selected, the new
waypoint will be placed ahead of the selected item.)
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The stored flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
INDEX
7) Repeat step number 6 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
8) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card:
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
6) Press the Import Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an existing flight plan is selected, an ‘Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL’ prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select ‘CANCEL’ using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the Import Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
AFCS
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the Export Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Export Flight Plan’.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
180
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
‘User waypoint database full. Not all
loaded.’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
‘Flight plan export failed.’
AFCS
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
locked.’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
EIS
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
waypoints imported successfully. No
stored flight plan data was modified.’
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
‘Flight plan import failed.’
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight
plan.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
These waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans
stored in the system have been modified.
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however
others had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in
the system.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
One or more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can
support. The flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system
cannot find in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but
must be edited within the system before it can be activated for use.
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored
user waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints
on the SD card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not
imported are locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the
system before it can be activated for use.
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to
naming conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card
may not have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed
prematurely.
APPENDICES
Table 5-11 Flight Plan Import/Export Messages
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight plans can be transferred to or from a mobile device via the Flight Stream 510 Bluetooth wireless
connection. Transfer of a flight plan to a mobile device is controlled by the mobile device.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Previewing a pending flight plan transfer from a wireless connection:
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight Plan pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Or:
EIS
Press the Preview Softkey to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key,
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Preview Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Ignoring a pending flight plan transfer from a wireless connection:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight Plan pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the CLR Key to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan will
still be available on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
Press the Ignore Softkey to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan
will still be available on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
AFCS
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pending Flight Plan
Store? or Activate?
Selection
Delete Softkey
Store Softkey
Activate Softkey
INDEX
Figure 5-48 Preview Flight Plan Page
182
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pending Flight Plan
EIS
Preview Softkey
Ignore Softkey
Figure 5-49 Pending Flight Plan Transfer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pending Flight Plan
Pop-Up Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Storing a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
5) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
6) Press the Store Softkey to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
AFCS
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store?’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
Or:
APPENDICES
a) Press the MENU Key,
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page.
4) Press the Activate Softkey. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ Window is displayed.
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate?’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ Window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to activate the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan becomes
the active flight plan and is removed from the Flight Plan Catalog Page. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ Window is displayed.
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD.
Deleting a pending flight plan:
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired pending flight plan.
AFCS
5) Press the Delete Softkey. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the CLR Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’.
APPENDICES
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
INDEX
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan is removed
from the Flight Plan Catalog Page. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
184
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting all pending flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete All Pending’.
5) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all pending flight plans?’ confirmation Window is displayed.
6)
EIS
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all pending flight plans. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select
the desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight
plans are limited to 100 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of
waypoints in the flight plan exceeds 100, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.”
appears and the new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Manually adding waypoints to a flight plan after a MANSEQ leg creates a lateral gap in the flight
plan. Time, fuel, and distance values for legs beyond the gap do not include the distance across the gap.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Stored Flight Plan Selected
AFCS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-50 Stored Flight Plan Page
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
‘Waypoint Information’ Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the ‘Waypoint Information Window’ with
a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed prior to the highlighted
waypoint.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
‘Waypoint Information’ Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window with
a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
AFCS
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key
2) Press the FMS Knob on the MFD to activate the cursor.
3) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint.
APPENDICES
4) Push the Joystick on the MFD to activate the panning function on the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page and pan
to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
INDEX
5) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the active
flight plan.
186
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The system also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
Airway Entry Waypoint
EIS
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected Airway
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-51 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Load Airway’. The Select Airway Page/Window is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the ‘Load Airway’
menu item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the
cursor position).
APPENDICES
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airway Entry Waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
Selected Airway Exit
Point
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airway Exit Points
Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-52 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only one direction.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For example, airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of
airway waypoints. That is, each waypoint may have its own conditional route in relation to another waypoint.
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
AFCS
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The system allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
188
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Plan Name
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
EIS
Softkeys
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan
Figure 5-53 Stored Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Departure Airport
AFCS
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMKC
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
APPENDICES
Figure 5-54 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Departure’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
- Departure Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
Selected Transition
Departure Transition
Points Available
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected
Departure End
Point
Figure 5-55 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ARRIVAL
INDEX
APPENDICES
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition
waypoints, and a runway.
190
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at KCOS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
EIS
Preview of
Selected Arrival
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-56 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Destination Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY3
AFCS
Preview of
Selected Arrival
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-57 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
- Arrival Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
APPROACH
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
An Approach Procedure (APR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Destination Airport
Selected
Approach
Approaches Available at
KCOS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Preview of
Selected
Approach
APPENDICES
Figure 5-58 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
INDEX
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
- Approach Loading’ Page is displayed.
192
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the ‘Approach Channel’ Field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
EIS
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
AFCS
Figure 5-59 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
The system can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the system is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The ‘Flight Plan Info’ Box displays departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude information
for the selected flight plan.
5) Press the Edit Softkey to open the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page.
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
Selected Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
Stored Flight Plan Info
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
AFCS
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-60 Stored Flight Plan Information
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
INDEX
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
194
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Activate Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘activate stored flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
EIS
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the Copy Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to flight plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Delete Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete flight plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
system.
Deleting the active flight plan:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ Window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some
waypoints in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) cannot be deleted individually. Attempting
to delete a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
NOTE: If removal of a flight plan item (waypoint, procedure, etc.) results in deletion of the end waypoint of
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
the active leg, an off-route direct-to to the deleted waypoint is created and activated.
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ Window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name> from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
196
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ Window is displayed.
AFCS
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the airway to be deleted.
INDEX
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name> from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the procedure to be deleted.
EIS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
198
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
EIS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
INDEX
Figure 5-61 Along Track Offset
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
3) Press the ATK OFS Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
EIS
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PARALLEL TRACK
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
While flying a parallel track:
• Initiating a direct-to will cancel the parallel track and fly direct-to the selected waypoint.
• Initiating a hold at the present position will cancel the parallel track and fly the holding pattern.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Initiating a hold at a waypoint will result in the aircraft flying the parallel track until a turn is required to fly
to the hold waypoint. If the hold is removed prior to reaching the hold waypoint, the parallel track will be
resumed. Once the holding pattern is active, the parallel track will not be resumed upon exiting the hold.
Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel tracks overlap as a
result of the course change.
AFCS
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
Activating parallel track:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel Track’ Window is displayed
with the ‘Direction’ Field highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘LEFT’ or ‘RIGHT’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘Distance’ Field is highlighted.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Parallel Track’ is highlighted.
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track activation.
200
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activation Prompt
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-62 Parallel Track Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Parallel Track
Waypoints
Original Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Parallel Track
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-63 Parallel Track Active
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDICES
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system,
the activation prompt is displayed, but disabled. If an approach leg is active, the status indicates
that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry
(e.g., there is a sharp turn of more than 120 degrees), the status indicates that the system is unable
to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry (‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route
Geometry’). If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type (‘Parallel Track Unavailable Not Allowed for Active Leg’). Parallel track is also unavailable for
a leg if there are no legs remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active. Parallel track
will be cancelled if the active leg changes to a leg where one of the preceding is true.
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activation of parallel track will apply from the current position along the flight plan until a leg that does not
meet the criteria for parallel track. Guidance will be computed to return to the original track at the beginning
of that leg.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel Track’ Window is displayed
with ‘Cancel Parallel Track?’ highlighted.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key.
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
Activating a flight plan leg:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
3) Press the ACT Leg Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘Activate’ highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and press
the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
AFCS
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert active flight plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the Invert Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
202
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Changing the flight plan view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the View Softkey to display the Wide, Narrow, Leg-Leg, and CUM Softkeys.
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the Leg-Leg Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the Wide Softkey to display the wide view, or select the Narrow Softkey to display the narrow view.
5) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Stored or Active
Flight Plan Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
All Airways
Collapsed View
APPENDICES
V4.SLN Airway
Expanded View
Figure 5-64 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference waypoint,
and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference waypoint.
EIS
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint. The system displays the bearing (BRG) and distance (DIS) to
the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user waypoint at this
location. Press the ENT Key. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ Window appears with
the Course Field highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Load?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
INDEX
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
204
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ Window appears
with the Course Field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
EIS
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘Hold?’ instead of ‘Activate?’
when finished (MFD or PFD).
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to waypoint is part of the active flight plan, the hold is inserted into
the active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)
Editing a user-defined hold:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Edit Hold’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ Window appears with the
Course Field highlighted.
APPENDICES
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Update?’ is highlighted to update the hold.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Waypoint
Selected
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
Inbound or Outbound
Leg Length Mode Button
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(Time or Distance)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
AFCS
(Right or Left)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map of Hold Location
Expect Further Clearance Time
INDEX
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-65 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
206
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoint
Selected
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course Direction
(Inbound or Outbound)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn Direction
(Right or Left)
Leg Length Mode
Button
(Time or Distance)
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Expect Further
Clearance Time
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
INDEX
Hold At Direct To Waypoint Selection
Figure 5-66 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the ‘HOLD’ waypoint.
EIS
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window (PFD or MFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
208
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following leg types: AF,
CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
Active Vertical Navigation Profile
Active Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabled (fields dashed)
EIS
The system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and terminal
phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a direct-to
waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a linear
deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Cncl VNV Softkey
ENBL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-67 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling and Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL- Active Flight Plan’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., FALUR)).
3) To Disable VNV guidance, press the Cncl VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and
press the ENT Key. Vertical navigation is disabled.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and
time to top of descent/bottom of descent (TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and
Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TOD items
displayed in the Active VNV Profile Box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually enabled. Vertical
guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to for any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,
the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the VNV Prof Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
INDEX
The system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database.
210
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Displayed Text
Examples
Cross AT or ABOVE
5,000 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Calculated Altitude
(White Text)
Edited Altitude Constraint
(Cyan Text with Pencil Icon)
Designated Altitude Constraint
(Cyan Text)
Cross AT 2,300 ft
EIS
White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
Cross AT or BELOW
3,000 ft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Temperature
Compensated
Figure 5-68 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
White Text
Cyan Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5OOOFT
Altitude is designated for use in determining
vertical guidance. A pencil icon indicates manual
designation or manually edited data entry.
Altitude retrieved from the navigation database. White line above or
below indicates the type of constraint, as shown in the preceding figure.
These altitudes are provided as a reference, and are not designated to be
used in determining vertical guidance.
The system cannot use this altitude in
determining vertical guidance because of an
invalid constraint condition.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude calculated by the system estimating the altitude of the aircraft
as it passes over the navigation point. No white line above or below to
indicate a potential constraint.
5OOOFT
AFCS
Table 5-12 Altitude Constraint Color Coding
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitudes associated with arrival and approach procedures are auto-designated. This means the system
automatically provides descending vertical speed and deviation guidance to an altitude(s) chosen by the system
for any waypoint prior to the FAF. Auto-designated altitudes are displayed as cyan text. Additionally, altitudes
can be manually designated prior to the FAF. The FAF can be manually designated if the selected approach
provides no vertical guidance (i.e. glidepath). Manually designated altitudes are displayed as cyan text and
pencil icon. For all designated altitudes, the system will automatically calculate altitude constraints prior to the
designated altitude, which are displayed as white text.
APPENDICES
The system will automatically calculate altitude constraints prior to the manually designated altitude, which
are displayed as white text. System calculated altitudes can also be manually designated. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a designated altitude.
INDEX
NOTE: All designated altitudes (cyan text) will be displayed in the Active Flight Plan Page and Flight Plan
Window without restriction bars regardless of what is shown on the published procedure.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Manually designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
Manually designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and highlight the desired waypoint altitude. Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively overriding
the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or ABOVE” or “AT
or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical profile.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference (white text). It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other
displayed altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing
an altitude to a non-designated altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
AFCS
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Entering/modifying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
APPENDICES
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
212
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event an
altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral waypoint,
the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude can be provided.
The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been edited.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude?’ confirmation window is displayed.
EIS
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Vertical Situation Display (VSD) can be shown on the bottom of the Navigation Map Page. The terrain,
obstacles, vertical track vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information (active flight plan information
consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNAV profile, TOD/BOD, and destination
runway) can be displayed on the VSD, depending on the selected mode. See the Hazard Avoidance section for
information about winds aloft, obstacles, and relative terrain on the VSD.
NOTE: Certain leg types (e.g. holds, heading legs) do not support VNAV PATH descents because the lateral
EIS
distance of those legs in unknown. The VSD will not show a VNAV profile for any legs that have no vertical
path guidance.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The VSD horizontal range is equal to the navigation map indicated range when the VSD is in Track mode.
When the VSD is in Flight Plan mode, the horizontal range is the lower of twice the navigation map indicated
range or the lowest range the displays all of the remaining active flight plan. The VSD altitude range automatically
changes when the navigation map range is changed to keep a constant ratio of altitude range to horizontal
range, until both minimum and maximum display limits have been met. At ranges above the maximum, the
altitude range remains constant at the maximum.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The aircraft symbol is displayed on the left side of the VSD. The position of the aircraft symbol on the vertical
scale is close to the top for a descent phase and in the middle for a cruise phase or if the phase is unknown.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If two waypoints are close together, and their labels or constraint values overlap enough to obscure any text,
one waypoint label/constraint value is removed and the vertical dashed line for that waypoint is displayed as
darker gray. The priority for which waypoint remains displayed is: (1) the current TO waypoint, (2) waypoint
with an altitude constraint, and (3) waypoint closer to the aircraft.
Enabling the Vertical Situation Display:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable the Vertical Situation Display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the VSD Mode Softkey to choose between Auto, FPL, or TRK.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the VSD Mode Softkey to choose between Auto, FPL, or TRK.
Disabling the Vertical Situation Display:
INDEX
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Off Softkey.
Or:
214
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VSD Mode (AUTO FPL)
Active FPL Waypoints
Altitude Constraints
Selected Alt. (9000ft)
Destination Runway
Vertical Situation
Display (VSD)
Current VNAV Profile
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Absolute Terrain
VSD Mode Buttons
- FPL
- TRK
- Auto
Obstacle
Figure 5-69 Vertical Situation Display (VSD)
AUTO FPL
Auto
Items available on VSD
Available active FPL & aircraft
within FPL swath
(1) Active FPL available &
aircraft not within FPL swath,
or (2) Active FPL not available
Terrain/obstacles along the active flight plan route, vertical track
vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information
Terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical track vector, and
selected altitude
AFCS
AUTO TRK
FPL Criteria
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VSD Mode Displayed
Button
Mode
Terrain/obstacles along the active flight plan route, vertical track
vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information
Active FPL not available
Only shows message 'Flight Plan Not Available'
Terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical track vector, and
Track
TRK
NA
selected altitude
Active flight plan information consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNAV profile, TOD/BOD, and
destination runway
Flight Plan
FPL
Active FPL available
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 5-13 VSD Modes
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
Terrain/obstacles are available on the VSD, and will be shown if the aircraft altitude is low enough for the
terrain/obstacles to be in view (terrain will be shown in gray if the terrain is selected Off on the Navigation Map).
The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of the terrain based upon the
highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the terrain database resolution, within a
predefined width along the active flight plan between the aircraft present position and the end of the map range
or active flight plan. The predefined width is determined by the flight phase.
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Phase
Approach, Departure
Terminal
En Route, Oceanic
Width of Swath
0.6 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm
Table 5-14 VSD Width of Swath
VSD MESSAGES
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
EIS
Message
‘Loading...’
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
‘Flight Plan Not Available’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
‘Flight Plan mode unavailable because aircraft off
course and active leg over 200 NM’
‘Aircraft Beyond Active Leg’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘Active Leg Begins Beyond Aircraft Position’
AFCS
‘VSD Not Available’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
‘VSD Data Old. Deselect and Reselect VSD’
Description
VSD is loading data due to a range change, full/half switch, or first being
selected for display.
Flight Plan mode is selected and there is not a flight plan loaded with at
least one leg.
All of the following are true:
- Flight Plan mode is selected
- The active leg is greater than 200 nm
- The aircraft is outside the swath
Flight Plan mode is selected and the aircraft’s position, as projected on
the flight plan, is past the end of the active leg.
Flight Plan mode is selected and the aircraft’s position, as projected on
the flight plan, is prior to the beginning of the active leg.
At least one of the following is true:
- Valid terrain database not available
- GPS MSL altitude not available
- Current barometric altitude not available
- Neither current track nor current heading available
- GPS position not available
- Map range setting is less than 1 nm
VSD data has failed to update for 2 seconds or more.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 5-15 VSD System Messages
216
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using any
Procedures (PROC) Key.
EIS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the origin and destination airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure in the
navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’, that indicates
a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading leg in the flight plan
displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the pilot to manually initiate
sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude
Manually Sequenced Heading Leg
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-70 Procedure Leg Identifiers
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing available procedures at an airport:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the Airport information Page.
Or.
Press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on
the Airport information Page.
EIS
Or.
Press the APR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Approach Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the Airport information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the procedure. The procedure is previewed on the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available procedures. Press the ENT Key to select the procedure. The
cursor moves to the next box (runway or transition). The procedure is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT Key to select the runway or
transition. The cursor moves to the next box (if available). The procedure is previewed on the map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT Key to select the runway or
transition. The cursor moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box or the ‘Minimums’ Box. The procedure is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the Info 1 Softkey or the Info 2 Softkey to return to the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
Loading a procedure into the active flight plan from the <Procedure> Information Page:
AFCS
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page:
Press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the Airport information Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or.
Press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on
the Airport information Page.
Or.
APPENDICES
Press the APR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Approach Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the Airport information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Select a different procedure, if desired.
INDEX
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the procedure. The procedure is previewed on the map.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available procedures. Press the ENT Key to select the procedure. The
cursor moves to the next box (runway or transition). The procedure is previewed on the map.
218
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runway or transition. Press the ENT Key to select the
runway or transition. The cursor moves to the next box (if available). The procedure is previewed on the
map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box or the ‘Minimums’ Box. The procedure is previewed on the map.
4) Press the MENU Key to display the <Procedure> Information Page Menu.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the procedure into the active flight plan.
EIS
DEPARTURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Departure’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page/Window is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Departure Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Available Procedure Actions
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Departure Preview
Loaded Procedures
Figure 5-71 Departure Selection
Loaded Departure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Departure
Departure Choices
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-72 Departure Loading
220
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
EIS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active flight
plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition
waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Arrival’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page/Window is displayed.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Destination Airport
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
INDEX
Figure 5-73 Arrival Selection
222
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Arrival
Loaded Arrival
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-74 Arrival Loading
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
AFCS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
An Approach Procedure (APR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance for
non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach is already in
the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by selection of an
approach and the transition waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “Load” or “Load and Activate” is given (“Load and
Activate” is only available for the active flight plan). “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan
without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate
waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure available for quick activation when needed.
“Activating” also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance
to the first waypoint in the approach.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS receiver
can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for primary guidance,
the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or ILS). The final course
segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to the proper frequency and
selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels
according to the published chart. LNAV+V is an LNAV with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance
in maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases where
LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach service
level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HSI Annunciation
Description
Example on HSI
LNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima. Advisory
vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/VNAV minima
(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima (downgrades to
(available only if LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided (downgrades to LNAV if
SBAS available) SBAS unavailable)
LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LPV minima (downgrades
(available only if to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
Table 5-16 Approach Service Levels
224
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page/Window is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
EIS
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the Approach Channel Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the ‘TEMP At’ <airport> Field. Turn the small FMS Knob
to select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘Activate’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
AFCS
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
NOTE: If there is no arrival procedure in the active flight plan, loading an approach after a destination
airport has already been entered will result in a duplicate destination airport waypoint being added to the
end of the enroute segment.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Destination Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Approach Preview
Approach Choices
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-75 Approach Selection
Loaded Approach
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Approach
APPENDICES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-76 Approach Loading
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page.
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
226
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page is displayed with the ‘Transition’ Field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Minimums
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the ‘TEMP At’ <airport> Field. Turn the small FMS Knob
to select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
AFCS
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps below to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the ‘Procedures ‘Window.
2) Highlight ‘Activate Vector-to-Final’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
1) From the ‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page, press the MENU Key on the MFD. The page menu is displayed with
‘Load & Activate Approach’ highlighted.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Missed Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
AFCS
Fly past the MAP, and press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD.
Or:
Press the Go-Around Button.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6600ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by the navigation database, and may be below, equal to, or above the published
minimums for this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,600 feet)
after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of
6,600 feet is reached. After reaching 6,600 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case
ADANE). If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established
to the published fix (ADANE) to begin the missed approach procedure.
228
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Course to Altitude Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-77 Course to Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if
the aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases
the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is displayed in slanted text.
AFCS
Activating temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page, press the MENU Key on the MFD. The ‘Page Menu’ Window is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Temperature Compensation’ Window is displayed.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the ‘TEMP At’ <airport> Field. The compensated altitude is computed as the
temperature is selected.
APPENDICES
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the Temperature Compensation Window on the
MFD, or in the References Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for the system,
therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the minimums.
Refer to the Flight Instruments section for information about applying temperature compensation to the
MDA/DH.
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Compensation?’ is highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
229
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
EIS
Compensated
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-78 Temperature Compensation
Uncompensated
Altitudes
AFCS
Compensated
Altitudes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-79 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The ‘Page Menu’ Window is displayed.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Temperature Compensation Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘Cancel Compensation?’ is highlighted.
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitude at the FAF is cancelled.
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/
deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.
230
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the Aux Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
Trip Statistics
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
AFCS
Fuel Statistics
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Figure 5-80 Trip Planning Page
APPENDICES
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure Time - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations are from the
aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated Airspeed - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary source of information
is GPS ground speed.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
• Indicated Altitude - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source of information
is GPS altitude.
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTs) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track - Desired Track is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints. It
is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown as
minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure time
all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the
ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current leg
being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to and
including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of
the flight plan was selected.
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
APPENDICES
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes of the
time at the destination.
FUEL STATISTICS
INDEX
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
232
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Fuel efficiency (Efficiency) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the current
fuel flow.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Time of fuel endurance (Total Endurance) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained by
dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (Remaining Fuel) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (Remaining Endurance) - This value is calculated by taking
the time of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
EIS
• Fuel required for trip (Fuel Required) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Total range at entered fuel flow (Total Range) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Density Altitude
• True Airspeed
The pilot may select Automatic or Manual page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint (WPTs) mode. In
automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTs selection).
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Leg(s)
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
Selected Flight Plan
AFCS
Figure 5-81 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Not Available
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-82 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
APPENDICES
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the Auto Softkey or the Manual Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the FPL Softkey or the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the ‘FPL’ Field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Trip Planning Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL Field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the Manual Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the ‘Departure Time’ Field and enter the desired value. Press the
ENT Key. The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat
until all desired values have been entered.
234
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.10 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
EIS
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the system
stops using GPS.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the
system uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when
available) to calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the system through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
AFCS
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in amber over the ‘own
aircraft’ symbol as shown in the following figure. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in amber on the HSI
slightly below and to the left of the aircraft symbol on the CDI. Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’
alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once
a valid GPS solution is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as amber text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in the
following figure. If the VSD Inset is selected on the MFD, ‘VSD Not Available’ will be displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Also, while the system is in DR Mode, some terrain functions are not available. Additionally, the accuracy of
all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to
function, but with degraded accuracy.
EIS
Distance &
Bearing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Current
Track
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Nav Data Bar
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
All data except
Active Leg, TAS,
and DTK are in
amber
INDEX
APPENDICES
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
Figure 5-83 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Amber
236
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the system are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69/69A or 69/69A SXM SiriusXM Weather (Subscription Optional)
• Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B) (Optional)
• L-3 Stormscope® WX-500 Lightning Detection System (Optional)
EIS
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Proximity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Terrain-SVT (Standard with SVS Option)
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class-B (TAWS-B) (Optional)
Traffic
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
®
• Garmin GTS 800 or Avidyne TAS600 Series Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
• Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) Traffic (Optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 DATA LINK WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Data Link Weather feature enables the system to receive weather information from a variety of weather
sources, depending on the equipment installed in the aircraft. These sources may include SiriusXM Weather and
Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B). For each source, a ground-based system processes the weather
information collected from a network of sensors and weather data providers.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SiriusXM Weather service, available with the Garmin GDL 69A and 69A SXM data link receiver and an active
service subscription, updates its weather data periodically and automatically, and transmits this information to the
aircraft’s receiver via satellite on the S-Band frequency. This service provides continuous reception capabilities at
any altitude throughout North America. Differences in performance between the GDL 69A and 69A SXM data
link receiver models, where relevant, are discussed where applicable in this section.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The FIS-B Weather service, available when equipped with a capable transponder or data link receiver which
can receive 978 MHz Universal Access Transceiver (UAT) data, delivers subscription-free weather information
periodically and automatically to the aircraft. FIS-B uses a network of FAA-operated Ground-Based Transceivers
(GBTs) to transmit the information to the aircraft’s receiver. Reception is limited to line-of-sight, and is available
below 24,000 feet MSL in the United States. FIS-B broadcasts provide weather data in a repeating cycle which
may take approximately ten minutes to transmit all available weather data. Therefore, not all weather data may
be present immediately upon initial FIS-B signal acquisition. FIS-B is a component of the Automatic Dependent
Surveillance (ADS-B) system, which offers both weather and traffic data; refer to the ADS-B Traffic discussion later
in this section for a more detailed discussion of the ADS-B system and its capabilities.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ACTIVATING DATA LINK WEATHER SERVICES
NOTE: Service activation is not applicable to the FIS-B Weather service.
APPENDICES
ACTIVATING THE SIRIUSXM WEATHER SERVICE
Before SiriusXM Weather can be used, the service must be activated by providing SiriusXM’s customer
service the coded ID(s) unique to the installed data link receiver. The Data Radio ID must be provided to
activate the weather service. A separate Audio Radio ID, if present, enables the receiver to provide SiriusXM
Radio entertainment. To view this information, refer to the following locations:
INDEX
• The Aux - XM Information Page on the MFD
• The SiriusXM Activation Instructions included with the Data Link Receiver
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
238
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to display weather data and/
or provide audio entertainment programming through the data link receiver.
Establishing an account for SiriusXM services:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the XM Radio Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) Note the Data Radio ID (for SiriusXM Weather data) and/or the Audio Radio ID (for SiriusXM Satellite Radio).
4) Contact SiriusXM customer service through the phone number listed on its website, www.siriusxm.com.
EIS
5) Provide SiriusXM customer service the Data Radio ID and/or Audio Radio ID, in addition to payment information,
and the desired weather product subscription package.
After SiriusXM has been contacted, it may take approximately 15 minutes until the activation occurs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Verifying the SiriusXM Weather service activation:
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the ‘Aux - XM Radio’ Page in the Auxiliary Page
Group.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) View the list of supported Weather Products. A white empty box appears next to an unavailable weather
product; a green filled box appears next to an available weather product. During activation, it may take several
minutes for weather products in the selected subscription package to become available.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Not all weather products offered by SiriusXM are supported for display on this system. This pilot’s
guide only discusses supported weather products.
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather
AFCS
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)
Select to Display XM
Information page
INDEX
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER PRODUCT AGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unlike real-time weather information collected directly from weather sensors on-board an aircraft, such as an
airborne weather radar or a lightning detection system, data link weather by contrast relies on service providers
to collect, process, and transmit weather information to the aircraft. This information can come from a variety
of sources such as government agencies. Due to the time it takes to collect, process, and distribute data link
weather information, it is imperative for pilots to understand that data link weather information is not real-time
information and may not accurately depict the current conditions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
For each data link weather product which can be displayed as a map overlay, such as radar precipitation,
the system can also show a weather product age. This age represents the elapsed time, in minutes, since the
weather service provider compiled the weather product and the current time. It does not represent the age of the
information contained within the weather product itself. For example, a single mosaic of radar precipitation is
comprised data from multiple radar sites providing data at differing scan rates or intervals. The weather service
provider periodically compiles this data to create a single composite image, and assigns one time to this image
which becomes the basis of the product age. The service provider then makes this weather product available for
data link transmission at the next scheduled update time. The actual age of the weather data contained within
the mosaic is therefore older than its weather product age and should never be considered current.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SiriusXM and FIS-B weather products are broadcast automatically on a repeating cycle without pilot
intervention.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Each data link weather product age has an expiration time. The weather product age is shown in white if it
is less than half of this expiration time, otherwise it is shown in amber until reaching its expiration time. After
a weather product has expired, the system removes the expired weather product from the displays, and shows
white dashes instead of the age. If the data link receiver has not yet received a weather product ‘N/A’ appears
instead of the age to show the product is currently not available for display. This may occur, for example, after
powering on the system but before the data link receiver has received a complete weather data transmission. It
could also indicate a possible outage of a weather product.
AFCS
The weather product age is shown automatically for weather products displayed on MFD maps. For PFD
maps, the pilot can manually enable/disable the age information.
Enabling/disabling the weather product age for PFD Maps:
1) With the PFD Inset Map or HSI Map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the WX LGND to show/remove the weather product age information for PFD maps.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Tables 6-1 and 6-2 show the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates for
SiriusXM Weather and FIS-B Weather, respectively. The broadcast rate represents the interval at which the
SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not contain updated weather product
information. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated or when the Data Link
Receiver receives new data. The service provider and its weather data suppliers define and control the data
update intervals, which are subject to change.
240
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
60
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
30
15 (69/69A)
30 (69/69A SXM)
7.5
SiriusXM Lightning (LTNG)
30
5
Cell Movement
30
1.25
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
12
METARs
90
12
City Forecast
90
12
Surface Analysis
60
12
Freezing Levels
120
12
Winds Aloft
90
12
County Warnings
60
5
Cyclone Warnings
60
12
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
90
22
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
12
Air Report(AIREP)
90
12
Turbulence
180
12
Symbol
NEXRAD
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
30
SiriusXM Weather Product
INDEX
12
APPENDICES
60
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
No product image
AFCS
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5
12
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
30
60
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No product image
EIS
Radar Coverage Not Available
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5 (U.S.)
10 (Canada)
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
NEXRAD Composite (US)
30
15
NEXRAD Composite (Regional)
30
2.5
METARs
90
5
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
10
Winds Aloft
90
10
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
5
30
2.5
60
10
Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FIS-B Weather Product
No Radar Coverage
no product image
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
(TAF)
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
no product image
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-2 FIS-B Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
DISPLAYING DATA LINK WEATHER PRODUCTS
WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM/FIS-B)’ Page is the principal map page for viewing data link weather
information. This page provides the capability for displaying the most data link weather products of any map
on the system. The Weather Data Link Page also provides system-wide controls for selecting the data link
weather source, if more than one source has been installed. The page title indicates the selected data link
weather source (e.g., “XM”, “FIS-B”).
242
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled Icon
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD Weather
Product Age (US)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Viewing the Weather Data Link Page and changing the data link weather source, if applicable:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B) Page. The currently selected data link
weather source appears in the page title.
3) If the page title does not contain the desired weather source, press the MENU Key.
AFCS
a) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’, or ‘Display FIS-B Weather’ (choices may vary
depending on the installed equipment).
b) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-3 Changing the Data Link Weather Source
INDEX
The system presents the softkeys for the selected source on the Weather Data Link Page, and for map
overlays used throughout the system. The following figures show the softkeys for the Weather Data Link Page
based on the selected source.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) PAGE SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Only softkeys pertaining to data link weather features are shown in the following tables.
Level 1
NEXRAD
Level 2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Echo Top
CLD Top
XM LTNG
Cell MOV
SIG/AIR
METAR
Legend
More WX
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cyclone
SFC
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
FRZ LVL
Wind
INDEX
ICNG
244
Level 3
Description
Enables/disables the NEXRAD weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Echo Tops weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Cloud Tops weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Lightning weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Cell Movement weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the graphical METAR weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Displays second-level SiriusXM Weather product softkeys.
Enables/disables the Cyclone weather product overlay.
Displays third level softkey for enabling/disabling the Surface Analysis and
City Forecast weather product and selecting a forecast period.
Disables the Surface Analysis and City Forecast weather product overlay.
Displays the Surface Analysis for the current time period overlay.
Off
Current
12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, These softkeys display a Surface Analysis and City Forecast overlay for the
selected future time period.
48 HR
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Enables/disables the Freezing Level weather product overlay.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
PREV
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product overlay.
Off
Softkeys available for Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather product for the surface (SFC)
selecting winds from through 15,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of
the Surface to 42,0000 altitude.
feet
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Next
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Displays altitude softkeys for the Icing weather product overlay.
Shows the previous level of Icing altitude softkeys.
PREV
Disables the Icing weather product.
Off
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 2
Softkeys available for
selecting winds from
the Icing altitude from
to 1,000 to 30,000 feet
Shows the next level of Icing weather product softkeys.
Next
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Displays softkeys for enabling/disabling the Turbulence weather product
overlay.
Shows the previous level of Turbulence altitude softkeys.
PREV
Disables the Turbulence weather product overlay.
Off
Softkeys available for Enables/disables the Icing weather product overlay from 21,000 feet to
selecting Turbulence 45,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
altitude from 21,000
feet to 45,000 feet
Shows the next level of Icing weather product softkeys.
Next
Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Enables/disables the AIREPs weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the County Warnings weather product overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AIREPS
PIREPS
County
Back
Description
Enables/disables the Icing weather product overlay from 1,000 feet to
30,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TURB
Level 3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) PAGE SOFTKEYS)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Level 1
NEXRAD
or
US
or
RGNL
or
US/RGNL
IR SAT
SIG/AIR
METAR
Legend
Level 2
US: Displays NEXRAD data for the Continental US (CONUS).
RGNL: Displays regional NEXRAD data.
US/RGNL: Displays regional NEXRAD data where available, and CONUS
NEXRAD data in other coverage areas.
Wind
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Description
Cycles through NEXRAD display modes with each press:
NEXRAD (with annunciator disabled): No NEXRAD is shown.
More WX
PIREPs
Back
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Level 3
Enables/disables the Infrared Satellite weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the METAR weather product overlay.
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Displays second-level Connext Weather product softkeys.
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft altitude.
Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
PREV
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product overlay.
Off
Softkeys available for Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather product for the surface (SFC)
selecting winds from through 15,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of
the Surface to 42,0000 altitude.
feet
Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Next
Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
Legend
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
Returns to the first level softkeys.
The Weather Data Link Page can display a legend for each enabled weather product.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link Page:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the Legend Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the XM Weather Legends Window, press the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the
FMS Knob.
246
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional information about the following weather products can be displayed by panning the Map Pointer
over the following products on the Weather Data Link Page:
• Echo Tops
• METARs
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• AIREPs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Cloud Tops
EIS
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Severe
Thunderstorm
Selected with Map
Pointer
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-4 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Certain weather products, such as METARs or TFRs have associated full text. When a weather product is
selected with the Map Pointer, press the ENT Key. The system displays the full text for the selected weather
product in a window. To remove the window, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
APPENDICES
The Weather Data Link Page also has a page menu that can be accessed by pressing the MENU Key. It has
controls for enabling/disabling the weather products as an alternative to using the softkeys.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Customizing the Weather Data Link Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Weather Data Link Page includes controls for selecting the maximum map range to display each
weather product on the page. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected maximum range,
the system removes the weather product from the map. If more than one data link weather source has been
installed, the system uses the same maximum map range for the comparable weather product of another
source.
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’ or ‘Product Group 2’, and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the changed settings.
NOTE: ‘Product Group 2’ is not applicable to FIS-B Weather.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Restoring default Weather Data Link Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
248
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WEATHER PRODUCT MAP OVERLAYS
Echo Top
+
Infrared Satellite
+
+
Cell Movement
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
+
METARs
+
+
+
+
Freezing Levels
+
Winds Aloft
+*
+
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Surface Analysis & City Forecast
+
+
Cyclone Warnings
+
Icing Potential
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
AFCS
County Warnings
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
APPENDICES
+
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
No Radar Coverage
TAFs
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Data Link Lightning
Flight Plan Pages
+
Nearest Page Group
Cloud Top
AUX - Trip Planning Page
Weather Data Link Page
+
Weather Information Page
Navigation Map Page
+
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
+
EIS
NEXRAD/Radar Precipitation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Data Link Weather Product
PFD Map
Other PFD and MFD maps and pages can display a smaller set of data link weather products. The following
table shows which data link weather products can be displayed on specific maps, indicated with a ‘+’ symbol.
* Winds Aloft data is available inside the VSD when VSD is enabled on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-3 Weather Product Display Maps
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Data Link Weather Products on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the softkey to enable/disable the desired weather product.
The Navigation Map Page also can display legends for weather products enabled on this map with the
Legend Softkey. This softkey is subdued if no weather products are enabled.
Showing/removing the weather legend on the Navigation Map Page:
EIS
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the Legend Softkey to show the Weather Legends Window.
4) When finished, press the Legend Softkey again, or press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the window.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Navigation Map Page also allows the pilot to select the maximum map range to display weather
products. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected maximum range, the system removes
the weather product from the map. The system uses this setting for all navigation maps, including those
displayed on the PFD.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the navigation maps:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
AFCS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The system can also display data link weather information on the PFD navigation maps.
Displaying Data Link Weather products on the PFD:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the desired weather product softkey(s) to enable/disable the display of data link products on the PFD map.
3) To enable/disable a data link lightning weather product on a PFD, press the Lightning Softkey.
a) Press the Datalink Softkey to enable data link lightning or press the LTNG Off Softkey.
b) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level PFD Softkeys.
INDEX
On the MFD maps, the weather product icon and age appear automatically when a weather is enabled and
the range is within the maximum display limits. On PFD maps, this information is available using the PFD
softkeys.
250
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling the weather product icon and age display (PFD maps):
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the WX LGND Softkey to enable/disable the weather product age, source, and icon box display on PFD
Maps.
EIS
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The page
menus also provide an alternative to using the softkeys to enable/disable data link weather product overlays
on maps.
WEATHER PRODUCT OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following is an overview of data link weather products the system can display.
NEXRAD (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Datalink weather radar information cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain, echo tops, icing,
or turbulence data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
AFCS
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
251
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-5 NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For radar sites in the United States, the NEXRAD weather product shows a composite reflectivity image.
This shows the highest radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. For radar
sites based in Canada, the NEXRAD weather product shows radar returns from the lowest antenna tilt angle,
known as base reflectivity. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the intensity of the echoes
and the type of precipitation, if known.
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on PFD maps
APPENDICES
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information.
252
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A mosaic of data from all the available NEXRAD radar sites is shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-6 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The pilot can select either the United States or Canada region for the desired NEXRAD coverage area on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page. NEXRAD information is shown for the selected region, while a gray shade of
purple is shown for the region which is not selected.
Selecting the NEXRAD Coverage Region on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
3) With Product Group 1 selected, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Region field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘US’ or ‘CNDA’, then press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the menu, push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
AFCS
The NEXRAD weather product age display indicates either ‘US’ or ‘CN’ for the selected coverage region.
Reflectivity
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
APPENDICES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Undetermined precipitation types may be displayed as mixed.
• An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information
about storms directly over the site.
EIS
• Precipitation may be occurring below the lowest antenna tilt angle (0.5º), and therefore the radar beam
overshoots the precipitation. For example, at a distance of 124 miles from the radar site, the radar beam
is approximately 18,000 feet above the radar site. The radar cannot detect any precipitation occurring
below the beam at this distance and altitude.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• At smaller map ranges, the smallest square block on the display represents an area of approximately
four square kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of radar
reflectivity sampled within the area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Unknown precipitation below 52ºN is displayed as rain regardless of actual precipitation type.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Block represents
approximately 4 km2
Figure 6-7 NEXRAD Weather Product with 30 NM Map Range
APPENDICES
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
INDEX
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
254
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed precipitation regardless of
actual precipitation type.
• If the precipitation type is unknown, the system displays the precipitation as rain, regardless of actual
precipitation type.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Coverage
Above 55°N
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Precipitation
Above 52°N
Always Displays
as Mixed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-8 NEXRAD Weather Product - Canada
AFCS
NEXRAD (FIS-B)
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDICES
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider to FIS-B compiles
the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time
to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual
images--gathered from each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD
weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the FIS-B GBTs, which transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be older than the current radar synopsis and may not
depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be used as a basis for maneuvering
in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
EIS
Boundary
of Regional
NEXRAD Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No radar coverage
within coverage
boundary
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-9 Regional NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The FIS-B NEXRAD weather product may be displayed for a region around the GBT (higher resolution,
updated more frequently) or for across the continental United States (lower resolution, updated less
frequently). A combined version of both weather products is also available for display on the same map.
When the combined NEXRAD is selected, regional NEXRAD takes display precedence where data is available,
and continental US NEXRAD is displayed outside of the regional NEXRAD coverage area.
256
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey. Each press cycles though a coverage option as the softkey name changes (US,
RGNL, or US/RGNL).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) To enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information for the continental United States, turn the small FMS
Knob to highlight the NEXRAD On/Off field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ to enable the display of NEXRAD for the continental United
States or ‘Off’ to disable.
b) Press the ENT Key.
4) To enable/disable the display of Regional NEXRAD information, turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
Regional On/Off field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ to enable the display of Regional NEXRAD or ‘Off’ to disable.
b) Press the ENT Key.
5) When finished, push the FMS Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Continental
USA NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
No radar coverage
APPENDICES
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-10 Continental US (CONUS) NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
INDEX
NOTE: When both NEXRAD options are enabled on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page menu, a combined
version is displayed.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enables/disables
regional NEXRAD
data display
Enables/disables
NEXRAD data display for
the continental United
States
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-11 Weather Data Link
(FIS-B) Page Menu
Figure 6-12 Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page Setup Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
3) To change the type of NEXRAD displayed, press the MENU Key.
AFCS
4) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group, then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Data Region field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘CONUS’ (continental United States), ‘RGNL’ (regional), or ‘Combined’,
then press the ENT Key. This selection also affects display of NEXRAD on the PFD Maps.
8) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
APPENDICES
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on PFD maps:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information.
NOTE: If equipped, FIS-B weather products can be shared with certain Bluetooth connected devices. Refer
INDEX
to Additional Features Section for Bluetooth pairing instructions.
258
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The regional NEXRAD weather product coverage area varies, as it is determined by the data received from
ground-based sources. When the regional NEXRAD weather product is enabled, a white spiked boundary
encloses this area to indicate the geographic limits of the regional NEXRAD coverage being displayed. The
system shows composite radar data from all available NEXRAD sites inside of this boundary area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product is shown (US Softkey enabled),
the coverage boundary is not shown on the map.
EIS
Continental
USA NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No radar coverage
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-13 Continental US (CONUS) NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
AFCS
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the
information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed
on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page. For the NEXRAD legend, select the Legend Softkey when the
NEXRAD weather product is enabled.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
No radar coverage
Boundary of radar
coverage area
Figure 6-14 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when NEXRAD is selected for display. Areas where radar data
is not currently available, has not yet been received, or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOTE: If the system has not received all available NEXRAD weather data (such as during initial FIS-B signal
acquisition or in areas of marginal or poor signal reception), the system may display areas of no radar
coverage which are subsequently removed as radar data is received. It may take up to approximately ten
minutes to receive all FIS-B data, when adequate reception is available.
EIS
Reflectivity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
AFCS
• At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of NEXRAD weather data are viewable. For the regional version
of the NEXRAD weather product, the smallest block represents 1.5 nm wide by 1 nm tall. For the
continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 7.5 nm wide by 5 nm
wide. The color of each block represents the highest radar reflectivity detected within that area.
• The continental US version of the NEXRAD weather product is not available above 60º of latitude.
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
APPENDICES
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
INDEX
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
260
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ECHO TOPS (SIRIUSXM)
NOTE: Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time as Cloud Tops or NEXRAD data is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Echo Tops weather product shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude for
selected Echo Top
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-15 Echo Tops Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying Echo Tops information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the Echo Top Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather
products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are removed.
APPENDICES
No Radar Coverage
INDEX
Figure 6-16 Echo Tops Legend
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CLOUD TOPS (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
NOTE: If a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver is installed, the broadcast rate for Cloud Tops is 30 minutes. As with
all SiriusXM Weather products, the product age becomes amber when it reaches half of the expiration time,
which is 60 minutes for Cloud Tops. Therefore, this weather product age may be amber during routine
operation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Cloud Tops weather product depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
AFCS
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Weather Product
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Select the CLD Top Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather
products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
Figure 6-18 Cloud Tops Legend
262
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DATA LINK LIGHTNING (SIRIUSXM)
NOTE: Lightning from a data link source cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
from an optional on-board lightning detection system.
The Data Link Light weather product shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes.
A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location of the
lightning strike is not displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Lightning
Strikes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-19 Data Link Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on Weather Data Link Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, select the Legend Softkey when
SiriusXM Lightning is selected for display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-20 Data Link Lightning Legend
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
INDEX
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Select the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on PFD maps:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
3) Press the Datalink Softkey.
4) When finished, press the Back Softkey.
CELL MOVEMENT (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Cell Movement weather product shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with
short, orange arrows.
Storm Cells
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional
information for
selected Storm Cell
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Weather Product
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, the Cell Movement weather product has a dedicated CEL MOV
softkey for enabling/disabling this weather product on this page.
NOTE: The Storm Cell base height is not available if a GDL 69 SXM or 69A SXM data link receiver is installed.
APPENDICES
In this case, the Storm Cell base height is displayed as 0 feet when the map pointer selects a storm cell.
Displaying Cell Movement information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page using the FMS Knob.
INDEX
2) Select the Cell MOV Softkey.
Figure 6-22 Cell Movement Legend
264
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
For navigation maps, the pilot can enable/disable the Cell Movement weather product using the NEXRAD
Softkey. For this to occur, the pilot must first enable the ‘Cell Movement’ option in the Map Settings menu
of the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting up the system to display Cell Movement with NEXRAD on navigation maps:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for the Cell Movement menu option. When set to ‘On’, Cell Movement
is enabled/disabled with the NEXRAD weather product on navigation maps. When set to ‘Off’, Cell Movement
is not displayed on navigation maps.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) When finished, push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to remove the menu.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
After the ‘Cell Movement’ option is set to ‘On’, refer to the previous procedures for enabling/disabling the
NEXRAD weather product to control both products simultaneously on navigation maps using the NEXRAD
Softkey.
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SIGMET (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition
occurring at a localized geographical position.
NOTE: If SiriusXM Weather is the active data link weather source and a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver installed,
the SIGMET and AIRMET weather products are not available unless at least one SIGMET or AIRMET has
been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no SIGMET or AIRMET is available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRMET for
Turbulence
AIRMET for IFR
conditions
EIS
AIRMET for
Icing conditions
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SIGMET
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-23 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) Press the ENT key. The following figure shows sample SIGMET text.
APPENDICES
Sample SIGMET Text
SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
INDEX
Figure 6-24 SIGMET/AIRMET Text and Legend
266
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
EIS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional Information on Weather
Feature Selected
with Map Pointer
METAR flag
selected with Map
Pointer
AFCS
Figure 6-25 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
APPENDICES
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information is displayed only in its original form when TAFs are available.
Displaying METAR and TAF text on the MFD:
1) On the Weather Data Link Page, press the METAR Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Select the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
AFCS
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-26 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the METAR legend on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page, select the Legend Softkey when
METARs are enabled for display.
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. The system displays a gray
METAR flag when the system cannot determine the METAR category based on the information available.
Figure 6-27 METAR Legend
268
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The system also shows METAR flags and their associated text on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MF.D.
The system shows a METAR flag next to waypoints in the flight plan with an available METAR.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an available METAR (indicated with a METAR flag next
to it). The METAR text will appear in the ‘Selected Waypoint Weather’ Window below.
EIS
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
Original METAR text is also accessible on navigation maps displaying METAR flags. When the map pointer
is panned over a METAR flag, the METAR text is shown in a box near the flag.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying original METAR text information on the PFD Inset Map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the METAR Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired METAR flag. Original METAR text appears on the map.
4) When finished, press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer.
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST (SIRIUSXM)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-28 Current Surface Analysis Data
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the SFC Softkey.
4) Press the softkey for the desired forecast time: Current, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey
label changes to show the forecast time selected.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Press the Off Softkey to disable the display of the weather product.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-29 Surface Analysis Legend
270
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREEZING LEVEL (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Freezing Level weather product shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at
which the first isotherm is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude
has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears when it
becomes available.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-30 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
AFCS
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the FRZ LVL Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-31 Freezing Levels Legend
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WINDS ALOFT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If the FIS-B option is installed and FIS-B is the active data link weather source, the Winds Aloft weather
product also displays temperatures aloft next to the winds aloft arrows on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
The Winds Aloft weather product shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3000-foot increments beginning at the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying the Winds Aloft weather product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page with the FMS Knob.
EIS
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the Wind Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Select the Next or Prev Softkey
to cycle through the altitude softkeys. The Wind Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-32 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet
INDEX
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Vertical Situation Display (VSD) on the
Navigation Map Page. The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not
to aircraft speed.
272
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Winds Aloft Data Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
Altitude Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-34 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on Profile View
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-4.
Tailwind Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Headwind Symbol
5 knots
AFCS
10 knots
50 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-4 VSD Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling the Vertical Situation Display (containing winds aloft data):
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable/disable the Vertical Situation Display.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft data inside the VSD is enabled by default when the VSD is displayed on the Navigation Map
Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display for the VSD:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Winds on/off field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
274
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COUNTY WARNINGS (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The County warning weather product provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings
from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on tornadoes, severe thunderstorms,
and flood conditions.
EIS
Flood
Warnings
Thunderstorm
Warning
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
Figure 6-35 County Flood Warning
Displaying County Warning information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
AFCS
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page with the FMS Knob.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the County Softkey.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-36 County Warnings Legend
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CYCLONE (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cyclone weather product shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical storms,
and their projected tracks. The system displays the projected track information in the form of
DD/HH:MM.
Cyclone
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-37 Cyclone Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page with the FMS Knob.
AFCS
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the Cyclone Softkey.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-38 Cyclone Legend
NOTE: If a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver is installed, the Cyclone weather product is not available unless at
INDEX
least one cyclone or tropical storm has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no
cyclone or tropical storm has been received.
276
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ICING (CIP & SLD) (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Current Icing Product (CIP) weather product shows a graphical view of the current icing environment.
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the
analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
EIS
Displaying Icing data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select the ICNG Softkey.
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Select the Next or PREV Softkey to
cycle through the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selected.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Light Icing Potential
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Moderate Icing
Potential
Figure 6-39 Icing Data at 18,000 Feet
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-40 Icing Potential Legend
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TURBULENCE (SIRIUSXM)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turbulence weather product identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass
associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000
and 45,000 feet. Turbulence information is intended to supplement AIRMETs, SIGMETs, and PIREPs.
Displaying Turbulence data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
EIS
3) Select the TURB Softkey.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the Next or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selection.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-41 Turbulence Weather Product at 21,000 Feet
INDEX
Figure 6-42 Turbulence Legend
278
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PIREPS AND AIREPS
NOTE: AIREPs are only available with the SiriusXM Weather service.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) are in-flight weather observations collected from pilots. When significant
weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs.
A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear,
and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically generate AIREPs.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIREP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Urgent PIREP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PIREP selected with
Map Pointer
AFCS
Figure 6-43 PIREPs and AIREPS on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the More WX Softkey.
3) Select the PIREPS or AIREPS Softkey. (Note the AIREPS Softkey is only available with the SiriusXM Weather
service.)
APPENDICES
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information
not present in the decoded version.
INDEX
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
279
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Decoded PIREP Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Original PIREP
Text
Figure 6-44 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
Figure 6-45 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TFRS
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
APPENDICES
In the United States, the FAA issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas where flight is
restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security, law enforcement,
natural disasters, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any time, and TFR data displayed on the
system is only intended to supplement official TFR information obtained from Flight Service Stations (FSS),
and air traffic control.
INDEX
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
280
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information for
selected TFR
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-46 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page or the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information Window.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
281
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-47 Full Text for Selected TFR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the
TFR product data is removed from the map.
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
AFCS
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting..
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
282
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIS-B WEATHER STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional information about the status of FIS-B weather products is available on the AUX - ADS-B Status
Page.
Viewing FIS-B status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘AUX - ADS-B Status’ Page.
On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) page, the pilot can enable/disable the FIS-B weather feature, which includes
all FIS-B weather products and related softkeys on various maps.
EIS
Enabling/disabling the FIS-B weather feature:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Enable FIS-B Weather’ or ‘Disable FIS-B Weather’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-48 Viewing FIS-B Weather Status on ADS-B Status Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ADS-B Status Page Item
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FIS-B Weather Status:
FIS-B Processing
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Weather Products:
AIRMET
CONUS NEXRAD
METAR
METAR GRAPHICAL
NOTAM/TFR
PIREP
REGIONAL NEXRAD
SIGMET
TAF
WINDS/TEMPS ALOFT
Status
Message
ENABLED
DISABLED
---------------AVAILABLE
Description
The FIS-B weather feature is enabled to process and display FIS-B weather
products.
The FIS-B weather feature is disabled.
No data received from the GDL 88 UAT.
FIS-B weather data is available for display for the weather product.
NOT AVAILABLE FIS-B weather data is not available for the weather product, and/or the system is
not receiving the FIS-B weather service.
AWAITING DATA The system is receiving the FIS-B weather service, and is waiting to receive the
weather product from the FIS-B data broadcast.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-5 AUX-ADS-B Status Page Messages for FIS-B Weather
284
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.2 STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING DETECTION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
NOTE: Stormscope lightning information cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as lightning
EIS
information from data link lightning sources.
Lightning Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system can display L-3 WX-500 Stormscope® lightning detection system information on the Stormscope
Page, and as an overlay on navigation maps. The system uses the symbols shown in the following table to depict
lightning strikes and cells based on the age of the information.
Symbol
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Strike is less than 6 seconds old
Strike is between 6 and 60 seconds old
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Strike is between 1 and 2 minutes old
Strike is between 2 and 3 minutes old
Table 6-6 Lightning Age and Symbols
AFCS
USING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
On the Stormscope Page, lightning information can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm,
and 200 nm.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Stormscope’ Page.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map range or counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
285
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Stormscope Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
Figure 6-49 Stormscope Page with Cell Mode Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode:
1) Select the ‘Map - Stormscope’ Page.
2) Select the Mode Softkey. The Cell and Strike Softkeys are displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the Cell Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or select the Strike Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper right corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level softkeys for the Stormscope Page.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Stormscope’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Stormscope Page Menu. Either ‘Cell Mode’ or ‘Strike Mode’ is highlighted
in cyan to indicate the mode to be selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key to select the highlighted mode and remove the menu. To remove the menu without changing
modes, press the MENU Key or the CLR Key, or push the FMS Knob.
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn . This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
Clearing Stormscope lightning on any map clears this information from all displays on the system.
APPENDICES
Manually clearing Stormscope cell or strike information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Stormscope’ Page.
2) Select the Clear Softkey.
Or:
INDEX
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Lightning Data’, then press the ENT Key.
Or:
286
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope Lightning’, then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying Stormscope information on MFD navigation maps:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
Displaying Stormscope information on PFD maps:
EIS
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
1) On the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Settings’ selected, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’,
and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
The following options are available:
• Stormscope On/Off field – Enables/disables the display of Stormscope lightning symbols.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Stormscope maximum display range – Selects the maximum map range to display Stormscope symbols.
Stormscope data is removed when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
• Stormscope Mode – Selects the Cell or Strike mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters or cells
of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
APPENDICES
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity. Stormscope identifies clusters of
electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
INDEX
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Settings’ selected, press the ENT Key.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Mode field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘Cell’ and ‘Strike’ options. When the desired item is selected, press
the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Press the FMS knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Stormscope Mode
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
Stormscope Navigation Map
Overlay Enabled Icon
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-50 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Lightning Data’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key.
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
2) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the select the ‘Weather’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Stormscope maximum map display range distance.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope maximum map display range distance.
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
To change the display range on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the
map range or counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
288
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.3 TERRAIN DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
EIS
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
latitude. This is due to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process
the data representing the affected areas.
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting requires the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B option. No terrain or obstacle
alerting occurs for the Terrain Proximity feature.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The terrain system increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) and
obstacles.
One of the following terrain systems is installed on this aircraft:
• Terrain Proximity
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Terrain-SVT (included with the Garmin SVT option when the Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class-B
(TAWS-B) is not installed; refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information about Garmin SVT.)
• TAWS-B (optional)
AFCS
The installed terrain system provides color indications on map displays when terrain or obstacles are within
a certain altitude threshold from the aircraft. Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B furthermore provide advisory visual
annunciations and voice alerts to indicate the presence of threatening terrain or obstacles relevant to the projected
flight path. This alerting capability is not present in the Terrain Proximity feature. Compared to Terrain-SVT
alerting, TAWS-B uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles. Only
the TAWS-B system complies with TSO-C15b certification standards, and includes additional alerting capabilities
than the Terrain-SVT system.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The terrain system requires the following for proper operation:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
APPENDICES
• Valid terrain and obstacle databases
The terrain system uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information
is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may
be shown if available in the database. Garmin verifies the data to confirm accuracy of the content. However, the
displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may still contain inaccuracies or
INDEX
The terrain system uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and
altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. The system
uses GSL altitude to determine alerts for the Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems. GSL altitude accuracy is affected
by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure
altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widelyused MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to
calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
EIS
The terrain and obstacle databases used by the terrain system are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position
and GSL altitude, terrain system displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the
position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, for the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B systems, the GPS position and
GSL altitude are used to calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain
and obstacles. In this manner, the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B systems can provide advanced alerts of predicted
dangerous terrain conditions.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.
RELATIVE TERRAIN SYMBOLOGY
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The terrain system uses colors and symbols to represent terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than 200
feet above ground level, AGL) present in the databases relative to aircraft altitude. The system dynamically
adjusts these colors as the aircraft altitude changes, and after takeoff and landing.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
While the aircraft is on the ground, the system displays relative terrain 400 feet or more above the aircraft
altitude using red, and terrain at less than 400 feet above aircraft altitude using black, as shown on the OnGround Legend. When the aircraft is in the air, the system displays relative terrain information using red,
yellow, green, and black, as shown on the In-Air Legend. As the aircraft transitions from on-ground to in-air, or
from in-air to on-ground, the display of relative terrain momentarily fades into the corresponding colors. For
Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B systems, if an alert occurs, the relative terrain colors transition to the In-Air Legend if
in the On-Ground Legend was shown in order to provide the flight crew with the most information possible.
On-Ground Legend
INDEX
APPENDICES
In-Air Legend
Figure 6-51 Relative Terrain Legend
290
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following figure shows the relative terrain coloring for the Terrain Proximity system.
Red
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
100 ft Threshold
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
EIS
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-52 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
The following figure shows relative terrain coloring for the Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems.
100 ft Threshold
Red
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2000 ft
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Projected Flight Path
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
AFCS
Figure 6-53 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B Systems
The following tables show the relative obstacle coloring used by the terrain systems.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
APPENDICES
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft
altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
INDEX
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Table 6-6 Relative Obstacle Symbols and Colors
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Lighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Wind Turbine Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft
altitude
EIS
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude
Table 6-7 Wind Turbine Obstacles and Colors
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems show potential impacts areas for terrain and obstacles using yellow and
red as shown in the the following table.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Potential Impact
Area Examples
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
Warning
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
or
Caution
or
AFCS
Table 6-8 Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B Potential Impact Area with Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Map - Terrain Proximity or Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B Page is the principal map page for viewing terrain
information. Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
• PFD Maps
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
• Terrain Proximity/Terrain-SVT/TAWS-B Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (MFD maps other than the terrain page):
APPENDICES
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the Map/HSI Softkey).
2) Press the TER Softkey until REL is shown to display terrain and obstacle data.
INDEX
When relative terrain is selected on maps other than the terrain page, an icon to indicate the feature is enabled
for display and a legend for the relative terrain colors are shown.
292
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain information can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized
by Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
EIS
Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20
nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
• Terrain Display – Turns the display of relative (‘REL’) terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which
terrain is shown
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Obstacle Data – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are
shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the changed settings.
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the Joystick. If the
map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
EIS
Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-54 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
TERRAIN PAGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The ‘Map - Terrain Proximity’, or ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’, or ‘Map - TAWS-B’ Page is specialized to show terrain,
and obstacle in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. This page is the
principal page for viewing terrain information. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be
enabled for reference.
AFCS
For Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems only, this page also shows potential impact areas. If an obstacle and
the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically adjusts to a map range if necessary to
emphasize the display of the potential impact area.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading, in which case the
orientation is track up. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map
range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the terrain page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity/Terrain-SVT/TAWS-B Page.
Showing/hiding aviation information on the terrain page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
294
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Map Orientation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
EIS
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-55 Terrain Proximity Page
TERRAIN-SVT AND TAWS-B ALERTING DISPLAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B software
algorithms. Terrain alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an
alert is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and voice alerts are simultaneously issued.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The terrain alert annunciation appears
to the left of the Selected Altitude box on the PFD, and bottom left on the MFD. If the terrain page is not
displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
AFCS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Pop-up
Alert
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-56 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
Potential Impact
Area
AFCS
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-57 Navigation Map Page
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
296
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following table lists the possible Terrain-SVT alerts.
MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVT Page)
Voice Alert
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
EIS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-9 Terrain-SVT Alerts Summary
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The following table lists the TAWS-B alerts.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
Voice Alert
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
EIS
or
*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
or
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
APPENDICES
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
INDEX
*
or
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Voice Callout
(VCO) “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
*
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up’
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
*
or
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration when more than one option is available are indicated with asterisks.
** Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-10 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
298
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B compares the projected
flight path as derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases.
The system issues FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of the
projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the ground
speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest runway
along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes narrower until
the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
EIS
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
Descending (FT)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Level (FT)
800
600
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
500
400
300
200
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
700
100
0
0
5
10
15
20
Distance From Runway (NM)
25
30
AFCS
Figure 6-58 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B FLTA alerts are manually inhibited, the annunciation is shown on the PFD and
in the MFD for maps displaying relative terrain
Terrain-SVT System
TAWS-B System
APPENDICES
Figure 6-59 FLTA Alerting is Inhibited when Annunciation is displayed
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ADDITIONAL TAWS-B ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In addition to the FLTA alerting discussed previously, TAWS-B provides the following additional types of
alerts.
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway.
EIS
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
800
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
600
500
400
300
PDA ALERTING AREA
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Distance to Destination (NM)
Figure 6-60 PDA Alerting Threshold
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by visual annunciations. NCR alerting is
only active when departing from an airport and when the following conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
INDEX
APPENDICES
NCR alerts can be triggered by either altitude loss or sink rate.
300
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1000
800
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
EIS
200
100
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-61 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1000
800
700
600
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
200
AFCS
100
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-62 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
SYSTEM STATUS
APPENDICES
TERRAIN-SVT
During power-up, Terrain-SVT conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. An voice
alert is issued at test completion.
INDEX
Terrain-SVT continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the system issues the voice alert “Terrain
System Failure” along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
Terrain-SVT requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums.
Should the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
annunciation ‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain-SVT Page. The voice
alert “Terrain System Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is returns and the aircraft is
within the database coverage area, the voice alert “Terrain System Available” is generated.
PFD/MFD† Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
System Test in Progress
System Test Pass
None
EIS
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
No GPS position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, and
Terrain-SVT operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle databases
None
Terrain-SVT Page Center
Banner Annunciation
TERRAIN TEST
Voice Alert
None
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“Terrain System Not Available”*
None
“Terrain System Not Available”*
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
† Annunciation is shown on Terrain-SVT Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-11 Terrain-SVT System Status Annunciations
AFCS
TAWS-B
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
INDEX
APPENDICES
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the system
displays the ‘TAWS N/A’ annunciation, and issues the “TAWS Not Available” voice alert. When the GPS
signal integrity returns and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the system issues the voice alert,
“TAWS Available” .
302
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Test in progress
None
TAWS-B FLTA Alerting Inhibited
No GPS position
TAWS TEST
None
None
“TAWS System Test Test OK”
None
None
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
None
“TAWS Not Available”
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
EIS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
None
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage
area
TAWS-B System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or invalid.
TAWS operating with PFD Terrain
or Obstacle databases
Voice Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Test pass
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD/MFD* Alert TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Annunciation
Alert Type
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
† Annunciation is shown on TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “TAWS Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-12 TAWS-B System Status Annunciations
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.4 VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD) TERRAIN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system offers a Vertical Situation Display (VSD), which includes a profile of terrain and obstacles in an
inset window on the bottom of the Navigation Map Page. Although the VSD does not display TAWS alerts and
potential impact areas, the VSD does use many of the same colors and symbols as TAWS to depict relative terrain
and obstacles within the VSD. Refer to the TAWS discussion for more information about relative terrain and
obstacle color correlation and symbols.
Enabling/Disabling the Vertical Situation Display (VSD):
EIS
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Select the Inset Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the VSD Softkey to enable or disable the VSD.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
The same controls which enable/disable the display of relative terrain and obstacles on the Navigation Map Page
also control the display of this information in the VSD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling VSD Relative Terrain on the Navigation Map (when VSD is enabled):
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
AFCS
3) Select the Terrain Softkey. Each selection cycles though an option displayed in cyan: Off (disables terrain), Topo
(to show topographical data) or REL (to show relative terrain).
VSD DISPLAY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the VSD is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown along a
vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally along
the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of the terrain based upon
the highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the terrain database resolution, within
a predefined width along the aircraft track between the aircraft present position and the end of the map range.
The predefined width is determined by the flight phase, as annunciated on the HSI, and is widest during enroute
or oceanic phases. Refer to the Terrain Proximity, Terrain-SVT, or TAWS-B discussions for more information
about displaying terrain or obstacles on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
304
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Approach
0.6 nm
Departure
0.6 nm
Terminal
2.0 nm
Enroute
4.0 nm
Oceanic
4.0 nm
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Total Profile View Width
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Phase
EIS
Table 6-13 Profile View Width Scale
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The forward looking swath of terrain is based on the selected VSD Mode, annunciated in the top-left corner
of the VSD Inset Window. In Flight Plan Mode, the contour follows the active flight plan, and if no active flight
plan is present, the VSD Inset Window displays ‘Flight Plan Not Available’. In Track Mode, the contour is based
on the aircraft ground track. In Auto Mode, the contour is based on the active flight plan, when available,
otherwise, it is based on the ground track.
Selecting a VSD Mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Select the Inset Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the VSD Softkey displaying the VSD mode in cyan. Each press of the softkey cycles through a mode
selection: FPL (flight plan), TRK (track), or Auto.
AFCS
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the Joystick, the horizontal distance of the VSD is adjusted
to match the distance shown on the map range arc, down to one nautical mile. If the Navigation Map range is
adjusted below one nautical mile, the VSD range remains at one nautical mile. When Navigation Map range is
adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles from
the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the VSD; only an outline of the terrain will be displayed
in black in the VSD Inset Window. Refer to the TAWS discussions for more information about displaying terrain
or obstacles on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Profile View
Path Enabled
Navigation Map
Range
Terrain Enabled Icon
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain Legend
Altitude Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Profile View Total
Distance
Distance Scale
Figure 6-63 VSD on the Navigation Map Page with Relative Terrain Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRACK MODE BOUNDARY
AFCS
The Track Mode Boundary represents the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the VSD. The boundary is
shown as a white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page and is only available when the VSD is enabled in Track
Mode. White range markers both edges of the Track Mode Boundary rectangle match the range markers along
the distance scale inside the VSD Inset Window whenever the profile range is at least four nautical miles (or 7.5
km if configured for metric units).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Track Mode Boundary may be enabled/disabled, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile Path
is removed from map display can be changed.
Customizing the Track Mode Boundary display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘VSD’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
INDEX
• TRK Mode BNDRY – Enables/disables the display of the Track Mode Boundary and sets maximum range at which
Track Mode Boundary is shown.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the changed settings.
306
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-64 Navigation Map Page Menu
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-65 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-66 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Profile Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.5 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory use only. TIS is intended to help the
pilot locate traffic visually. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
EIS
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS.
Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: TIS is disabled if a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses
the Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is
updated every 5 seconds. The system displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000 feet
below to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. The system displays TIS traffic with the symbology shown in
the following table.
TIS Symbol
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-Threat Traffic
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
AFCS
Table 6-14 TIS Traffic Symbols
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic meets the advisory criteria for the TA,
a solid yellow circle symbol appears. A TA which is detected but is outside the range of the map on which traffic
is displayed are indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map.
APPENDICES
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page
on which traffic can be displayed.
INDEX
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.
308
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic TIS is
operating:
EIS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Terrain-SVT option is installed and enabled.
See the Additional Features Section for details.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enabling/disabling traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Select the Traffic Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, an icon is shown to indicate the feature is
enabled for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic, Not
Reporting
Altitude
AFCS
TA Off Scale
Banner
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic System
Status Banner
Annunciations
Figure 6-67 TIS Traffic on Navigation Map Page
APPENDICES
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data (symbols
and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the
Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling traffic information on the PFD Inset Map or HSI Map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display traffic information on the Inset Map or HSI Map.
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
• Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the changed settings.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
AFCS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s
current position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always
heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 2 to 12 nm, as
indicated by the map range rings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page. When the aircraft is
on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby
to Operating Mode and the system begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion
for more information.
APPENDICES
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
INDEX
Press the TIS OPER Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
310
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Mode Annunciation
“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 4.0 nm,
1100’ Above,
Descending
Range
Marking
Rings
EIS
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic, 1200’
Above,
Descending
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
400’ Below, Level
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select
to Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciations
Figure 6-68 Traffic Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TIS ALERTS
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
AFCS
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds
and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
311
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-69 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
AFCS
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the TNA Mute Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
312
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
FAILED
EIS
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Banner Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
DATA FAILED
a failure is detected in the data stream*
The transponder has failed*
TIS is unavailable or out of range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
UNAVAILABLE
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-15 TIS Failure Annunciations
Traffic Map Center
Traffic Overlay Status
Banner Annunciation Icon (Navigation Maps)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Mode
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
Description
TRFC FAIL
OPERATING
None
OPERATING
UNAVAILABLE
STANDBY
STANDBY
TIS is in Standby Mode.
UNIT FAILED
TRFC FAIL
The transponder has failed*
APPENDICES
NO DATA
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TRFC FAIL
AFCS
Data is being received from the transponder,
but a failure is detected in the data stream*
Data is not being received from the
transponder*
TIS is operating and is receiving traffic data
from a data link.
TIS is operating, but the traffic service is
currently unavailable or is out of reception
range.
DATA FAILED
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-16 TIS Modes and Status Annunciations
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Switching between TIS modes:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper left
corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
EIS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed, as shown in the following table.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA X.X ± XX ↕
AGE MM:SS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRFC COAST
TRFC RMVD
AFCS
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 6-17 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
314
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.6 TAS TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of other aircraft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed intermittently, or
not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb
descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Mode-S TIS is disabled when TAS installed.
NOTE: If a Garmin GTX 345R transponder is installed with this traffic system, refer to the ADS-B traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
discussion for more information about ADS-B traffic displays.
NOTE: If an optional Avidyne TAS600 is installed, refer to the applicable Pilot’s Guide from the manufacturer
for detailed information about that traffic system.
AFCS
The optional Garmin GTS 800 or Avidyne TAS600 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). It enhances flight
crew situational awareness by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also
provides visual annunciations and voice alerts to help the pilot visually acquire traffic.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Garmin GTS 800 is capable of tracking up to 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A or C transponders,
and up to 30 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode S transponders. A maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest
threat potential can be displayed simultaneously.
No TAS surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating transponders.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
THEORY OF OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the traffic system is in Operating Mode, the system directly interrogates the transponders of other
aircraft in the vicinity. The traffic system uses this information to derive the distance, relative bearing, and if
reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The traffic system then
calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach (CPA). If the closure
rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), the traffic system provides visual annunciations and
voice alerts.
TAS SURVEILLANCE VOLUME AND SYMBOLOGY
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The GTS 800 TAS surveillance system monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude. Under
ideal conditions, the system scans transponder traffic up to 12 nm in the forward direction. The range is
somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the directional interrogation signal patterns. In
areas of greater transponder traffic density or when TCAS II (Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System II)
systems are detected, the GTS 800 automatically reduces its interrogation transmitter power (and therefore
range) in order to limit potential interference from other signals.
NOTE: The Garmin traffic system does not display traffic determined to be on the ground, including Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
C transponder equipped aircraft operating below 300’ AGL that is not climbing. However, if own aircraft
has ADS-B In capability, and is receiving traffic information from an ADS-B source (including ADS-R, ADS-B,
TIS-B), the system does display this traffic while operating in SURF Mode. Refer to the ADS-B Traffic Section
for more information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If a Garmin GTX 335 ES transponder is installed, the system uses the following symbols to represent traffic.
TAS Symbol
Description
AFCS
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 6-18 TAS Symbol Description
316
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If a Garmin GTX 345 transponder is installed with the TAS, the symbols in the following table depict traffic,
and include Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) information. Refer to the ADS-B Traffic
discussion later in this section for more information.
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Symbol
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
EIS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper
bearing.
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
AFCS
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the
ground.
Table 6-19 ADS-B Traffic Symbology with GTX 345R Transponder
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a solid amber circle or circle enclosing an arrow, alerts the crew to a
potentially hazardous intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria.
A TA that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the
screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
APPENDICES
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or arrow, indicates the intruding aircraft is
within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
Other, non-threat traffic, shown as an open white diamond or arrow, is displayed for traffic beyond six
nautical miles that is neither a TA or PA.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet. When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus sign ‘-’
indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The system displays the altitude vertical trend as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in
either direction) to the right of the intruder symbol.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Relative Altitude
Vertical trend arrow
EIS
Figure 6-70 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
NOTE: If an optional Avidyne TAS600 is installed, refer to the applicable Pilot’s Guide from the manufacturer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
for detailed information about that traffic system.
TA ALERTING CONDITIONS (GTS 800)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GTS 800 traffic system automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance
TA alerting when the aircraft is more likely to be near an airport. The system uses Level A (less) sensitivity
when the height above terrain is at or below 2,000’ AGL. If the height above terrain is unavailable, Level A
sensitivity applies when the ground speed is less than 120 knots. In all other conditions, Level B (higher)
sensitivity applies.
A
Yes
A
No
B
Yes
B
No
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Sensitivity Intruder Altitude
Level
Available
TA Alerting Conditions
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is within 600 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of separation or intruder range is
within 0.2 NM.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is within 800 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of separation or intruder range is
within 0.55 NM.
INDEX
Table 6-20 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
318
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: If an optional Avidyne TAS600 is installed, refer to the applicable Pilot’s Guide from the manufacturer
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
for detailed information about that traffic system.
When the GTS 800 detects a new TA, the following occur:
Relative Altitude
Approximate Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bearing
EIS
• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA. For example, the
announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft,
above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
Table 6-21 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashes for five seconds, and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• A PFD map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate
“TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
Figure 6-71 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM TEST
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not available during the system test. Use caution when performing a system
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
test during flight.
NOTE: If an optional Avidyne TAS600 is installed, refer to the applicable Pilot’s Guide from the manufacturer
for detailed information about that traffic system.
EIS
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify the TAS is operating normally. The test takes about
ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols appears on the
Traffic Map Page. For the GTS 800, if system test passes, the system announces, “TAS System Test Passed” or
“TAS System Test Failed.” When the system test is complete, the traffic system enters Standby Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Testing the traffic system:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the Joystick to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern to be displayed during test.
4) Press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey.
5) Press the Test Softkey.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) With the Traffic system in Standby mode, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
TAS Test Mode
Figure 6-72 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
320
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OPERATION
NOTE: The Garmin GTS 800 TAS automatically changes from Standby to Operating mode eight seconds
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
after takeoff. The system also automatically changes from Operating to Standby mode 24 seconds after
landing.
When the avionics system initially receives power on the ground, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The
system must be in Operating Mode for traffic to be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
Changing traffic system modes on the Traffic Map Page:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the Operate or TAS OPER Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
4) Press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ is displayed in
the Traffic mode field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) With the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2)
Turn the small FMS knob to highlight the desired mode.
3) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
AFCS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position
and altitude, without basemap clutter. It is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Aircraft
orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. The pilot can adjust the map range with
the Joystick. A range indication appears on each range ring.
The system annunciates the traffic mode and altitude display mode in the upper right corner of the Traffic
Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAS Operating Mode
Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000’ below,
climbing
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
EIS
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
Traffic Display
Range Rings
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
Figure 6-73 Traffic Map Page
Altitude Display Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic is
displayed. TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, select the ALT Mode Softkey.
AFCS
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
• Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 9900 feet above the aircraft to 2700
feet below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to
2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
• Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9900
feet below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
APPENDICES
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, select the Back Softkey.
INDEX
Or:
322
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in step 2 above):
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
•
3) Select the ENT Softkey.
EIS
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick, and rings on the map denote the ranges.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
2) The following range options are available:
750 ft and 1500 ft (with optional ADS-B)
•
1500 FT and 0.5 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
0.5 nm and 1 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
1 nm and 2 nm (with optional ADS-B)
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
AFCS
•
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
750 ft (with optional ADS-B)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
•
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic unit
is operating:
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
APPENDICES
• Navigation Map Page
• Trip Planning Page
Enabling/disabling traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
INDEX
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Select the Traffic Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When traffic is selected on maps other than the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, the system shows a traffic status
icon to indicate traffic is enabled for display as well as the altitude display mode (Above, Below, Normal,
Unres).
Proximity
Advisory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic
Advisory OffScale Banner
Annunciation
Traffic overlay
enabled icon and
Altitude Display
Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-74 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
• Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
APPENDICES
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
INDEX
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
324
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Traffic Map is available on the PFD by pressing the TFC Map Softkey. A traffic map will appear in
heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic and optional
datalink weather information on navigation maps.
Enabling/disabling traffic overlay on PFD navigation maps:
EIS
1) With the Inset Map or HSI Map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey on the PFD.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display traffic information.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ shown in center of page)
Traffic System Test
Initiated
OPERATING
Operating
Traffic System Failed*
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
Standby
FAIL
* See Table 6-23 for additional failure annunciations
AFCS
Table 6-22 Traffic Modes
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-23 TAS Failure Annunciations
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
325
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TA OFF SCALE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending).
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
EIS
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-24 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
326
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.7 ADS-B TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
NOTE: If equipped, ADS-B Traffic can be shared with certain Bluetooth connected devices. Refer to Additional
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Features Section for Bluetooth pairing instructions.
ADS-B SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) is a core technology in the FAA NextGen air traffic
control system. It offers improved surveillance services, both air-to-air and air-to-ground, especially in areas
where radar coverage is ineffective due to terrain, or where it is impractical or cost prohibitive. ADS-B is
comprised of three segments for the purposes of providing traffic information: ADS-B (Broadcast), ADS-R
(Rebroadcast), and Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ADS-B includes the automatic broadcast of position reports by aircraft, surface vehicles, and transmitters on
fixed objects. These broadcasts contain information such as GPS position, identity (Flight ID, Call Sign, Tail
Number, ICAO registration number, etc.), ground track, ground speed, pressure altitude, and emergency status.
AFCS
1090 ES
UAT
RADAR
Composite
GPS
1090 ES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
18,000 FT
10,000 FT
Mode A/C
ATC
UAT
UAT
APPENDICES
RADAR
UAT
1090 ES
ADS-B Ground Station (ADS-R,
TIS-B, FIS-B)
Figure 6-75 ADS-B System
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three classifications of aircraft or
system capability: ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B participating. ADS-B In refers to the capability to receive
ADS-B information. ADS-B Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B information. ADS-B participating
refers to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information. Aircraft lacking either ADS-In, ADS-B Out,
or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADS-B nonparticipating aircraft.
The ADS-B system operates on two frequencies: 1090 MHz and 978 MHz. Both frequencies provide the same
traffic information. An aircraft may be ADS-B In, Out, or participating on one or both frequencies, depending
on the installed equipment. The 1090 MHz frequency portion of ADS-B is known as 1090 Extended Squitter
(1090 ES). The 978 MHz portion of ADS-B is known as Universal Access Transceiver (UAT).
EIS
The optional Garmin GTX 335 ES transponder provides ADS-B Out functions using the 1090 ES data link,
and no ADS-B In traffic display is provided.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional Garmin GTX 345R transponder provides ADS-B Out functions using the 1090 ES data link. It
also performs ADS-B In functions using the UAT data link. For the GTX 345, this includes the reception of
Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B) data link weather service, provided when the aircraft is receiving
data from a participating ground station; refer to the Data Link Weather section for more information about
FIS-B Weather.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE-REBROADCAST (ADS-R)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Because it is not required that ADS-B In capable aircraft be able to receive ADS-B data on both the 1090
MHz and 978 MHz data links, a method exists to get data from one data link to the other. ADS-R is the
rebroadcast of ADS-B data by FAA ground stations, which provide this service by taking traffic data from one
link and rebroadcasting it on the other. For example, if two aircraft are in the service volume for a ground
station, and one is transmitting on 1090 MHz and the other is transmitting on 978 MHz, the ground station
retransmits the data from each aircraft on the other link to ensure the two aircraft can “see” each other as
traffic.
AFCS
For example, if another aircraft can only receive 978 MHz UAT information, it cannot directly ‘see’ another
aircraft sending only 1090 ES information aircraft unless an ADS-R ground station in the vicinity rebroadcasts
the 1090 ES data over the 978 MHz UAT frequency. This is also true for an aircraft when can only receive
1090 ES data; it would need an ADS-R ground station to ‘see’ another aircraft operating on the UAT frequency.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (TIS-B)
APPENDICES
TIS-B provides a link between the secondary surveillance radar (SSR)-based system ATC uses and the ADSB-based system. When an ADS-B In or Out capable aircraft is within the service volume of an FAA ADS-B
ground station, the ground station broadcasts a portion of the ATC radar data to the aircraft. This aircraft is
then included in the list of aircraft being provided TIS-B service and is then considered a “TIS-B participant.”
TIS-B coverage is available when the aircraft is within ground station coverage, in SSR coverage, and the
other aircraft is also in SSR coverage, and is transmitting its altitude.
INDEX
The ground station provides ATC radar information for other aircraft within ±3,500 feet and 15 NM of the
participant, to include altitude, position, ground speed, and ground track. TIS-B broadcasts occur once every
three to thirteen seconds, depending on the characteristics of the ground station providing the TIS-B service.
328
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B WITH TAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the system is receiving ADS-B In traffic and with a Garmin GTS 800 TAS in Operating Mode, the
system attempts to match (or “correlate”) data the two traffic sources. When a correlation is made, the system
displays the traffic information for the tracked aircraft determined to be the most accurate. Any traffic that is
not correlated (i.e., only detected by one system but not the other) is also displayed for the flight crew. This
may occur, for example, if another aircraft is beyond the surveillance range of the TAS, but own aircraft is
receiving information via ADS-B for the other aircraft. The traffic correlation feature improves the accuracy
of the traffic displayed, while reducing the occurrence of displaying the same traffic for a given aircraft twice.
EIS
NOTE: When operating on the edges of ATC radar coverage or when using an optional active traffic system
providing intermittent traffic data, a single aircraft may be briefly or periodically depicted as two aircraft on
the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Other Aircraft Equipment
Viewable by GTX 345R Equipped Aircraft
1090ES Out Equipped
Yes
UAT Receive Only Capable
No
UAT Transmit Equipped
Yes
No Transponder, No ADS-B
No
Non ADS-B Equipped, but with Mode C or S Transponder
Yes*
* Only when in ADS-B ground station coverage and when the other aircraft is in ATC radar coverage, or own
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
aircraft is equipped with a TAS/TCAS I system and traffic is within the TAS/TCAS I surveillance range.
Table 6-25 Aircraft Available for Viewing by an ADS-B Equipped Own Aircraft
CONFLICT SITUATIONAL AWARENESS & ALERTING
AFCS
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is an alerting algorithm which provides ADS-B traffic alerting similar to
the TAS system discussed previously.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The transponder issues a voice alert when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is displayed, for example “Traffic! Two
O’clock, Low, Two Miles.” This annunciation and voice alert is the same as the alerts issues by the Garmin GTS
800 TAS discussed previously.
The own aircraft altitude above terrain determines the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm to minimize nuisance
alerts. Height Above Terrain, and Geodetic Sea Level (GSL) altitude are used to adjust the sensitivity of the CSA
algorithm in accordance with the following table:
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
329
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Sensitivity
Level
Height Above
Terrain (HAT)
4
4
4
5
5
Any
Any
Unavailable
Any
>1000
<=2350
Unavailable
Unavailable or
>2350
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
5
6
7
Unavailable or
>2350
8
Unavailable or
>2350
9
Unavailable or
>2350
10
Unavailable or
>2350
Vertical
Protected
Own Altitude Look-ahead
GPS Phase of Flight
Threshold for Volume
(Feet)
time (sec)
Alert (feet)
(NM)
Any
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
Any
20
850
0.20
Approach
Any
20
850
0.20
Any
Any
25
850
0.20
Any
Any
25
850
0.20
Terminal
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Not approach and not
Terminal (including
unavailable)
Any
<=5000
25
30
850
850
0.20
0.35
>5000
<=10,000
40
850
0.55
>10,000
<=20,000
45
850
0.80
>20,000
<=42,000
48
850
1.10
> 42,000
48
1200
1.10
Table 6-26 CSA Alerting Thresholds for ADS-B Traffic
AFCS
When the system detects a new Traffic Advisory (TA), the following occur:
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA. For example, the
announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft,
above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
Bearing
Relative Altitude
Approximate Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Zero miles”, “Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
Table 6-27 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
INDEX
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears to the right of the Airspeed Indicator on the PFD, flashes for five seconds,
and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area..
330
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• If the PFD Inset Map or HSI Map was already displayed, the traffic is shown on the displayed map. Otherwise
the Traffic Map is shown on the PFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate ‘TA’
followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer a factor.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-76 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: ADS-B traffic voice alerts are suppressed when below 400 feet.
AIRBORNE AND SURFACE APPLICATIONS
AFCS
ADS-B traffic can help the pilot visually acquire traffic both in the air and on-the-ground. There are two ADS-B
applications or modes: Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situational Awareness (SURF). The
system automatically selects the appropriate application based on conditions.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The AIRB application is on when the aircraft is more than five NM and 1,500 feet above the nearest airport.
When the AIRB application is active, the system only displays traffic which is airborne.
APPENDICES
The SURF application is on when the aircraft is within five NM and less than 1,500 feet above field elevation.
When the SURF applications is on, the system displays airborne and on the ground traffic. At a Traffic Map
Page range of one nm or less, the airport environment (including taxiways and runways) appears in addition to
traffic. The airport displays are derived from the SafeTaxi database. Refer to the Additional Features section for
more information about SafeTaxi displays.
NOTE: Do not rely on the solely on the traffic display to determine the runway alignment of traffic, especially
when runways are in close proximity to each other.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B services, not all traffic symbols
may not be depicted on the traffic display. Because higher data precision is required for traffic to be displayed
in the SURF environment, some traffic eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF is on. Availability for
AIRB and SURF is depicted on the Aux - ADS-B Status Page, discussed later in this section.
SURF Application On
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Ground-based
vehicle
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft on the
ground
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-77 Traffic Map Page with SURF Mode On
332
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in the following table. Above or below the traffic symbol
is the traffic identifier, and altitude. A small up or down arrow next to the traffic symbol indicates that the traffic
is climbing or descending at a rate of at least 500 feet per minute.
Description
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
EIS
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
AFCS
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Table 6-28 ADS-B Traffic Symbology
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
OPERATION
APPENDICES
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AIRB Application On
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
EIS
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
Traffic Display
Range Rings
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
Figure 6-78 Traffic Map Page
Enabling/disabling the display of ADS-B traffic:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Select the ADS-B Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘ADS-B On’ or ‘ADS-B Off’.
AFCS
b) Press the ENT Key.
Testing the display of ADS-B traffic:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) If necessary, turn the Joystick to select a map range of 2 and 6 nm to ensure full test pattern display.
3) Ensure the the ADS-B Softkey is disabled.
4) If the optional TAS is installed, ensure the TAS STBY Softkey is enabled.
APPENDICES
5) Press the Test Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Test Mode’.
INDEX
c) Press the ENT Key.
334
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A test pattern of traffic symbols appears during the test, and a ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears on the
PFDs. At the conclusion of the test, the system issues the voice alert “Traffic System Test”. If the test pattern
is displayed and the voice alert is heard, the system has passed the test.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADS-B Test Mode
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-79 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity traffic is displayed.
TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
AFCS
1) On the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, select the ALT Mode Softkey.
2) Select one of the following softkeys:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
•
APPENDICES
• Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, select the Back Softkey.
Or:
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight one of the following options (see softkey description in step 2 above):
•
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
3) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
DISPLAYING MOTION VECTORS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic symbols depict the
traffic’s reported track and speed over the ground. When Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors
extending from the traffic symbols display how the traffic is moving relative to own aircraft. These vectors
are calculated using the traffic’s track and ground speed and own aircraft’s track and ground speed. These two
values are combined to depict where the traffic is moving purely with respect to own aircraft, and provide a
forecast of where the traffic will be, relative to own aircraft, in the near future.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Absolute
Motion Vectors
Absolute Motion Vectors
selected
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-80 Traffic Map Page with Absolute Motion Vectors Enabled
336
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Relative Motion
Vectors
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Relative Motion Vectors
selected
Figure 6-81 Traffic Map Page with Relative Motion Vectors Enabled
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Enabling/disabling the Motion Vector display:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Select the Motion Softkey.
3) Select one of the following softkeys:
•
Absolute: Displays the motion vector pointing in the absolute direction.
•
Relative: Displays the motion vector relative to own aircraft
•
Off:
AFCS
Disables the display of the motion vector.
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Relative Motion’, ‘Absolute Motion’ or ‘Motion Vector Off’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Adjusting the duration for the Motion Vector projected time:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Select the Motion Softkey.
3) Select the Duration Softkey.
INDEX
4) Select a softkey for the desired duration (30 SEC, 1 MIN, 2 MIN, 5 MIN).
5) When finished, select the Back Softkey to return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
337
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Additional Traffic Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page can display additional information for a selected aircraft symbol. This may
include the aircraft tail number/Flight ID, type of aircraft (e.g., glider, small/medium/large aircraft, service
vehicle, unmanned airborne vehicle (UAV)), course, track, groundspeed), and other information.
Showing additional traffic information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob. The first selected traffic symbol is highlighted in cyan. Additional information appears in
a window in the upper-right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
3) To select a different aircraft symbol, turn the FMS Knob to move the cyan bracket until the selected aircraft
traffic symbol is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob again to disable the traffic selection.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The display range on the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable
with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) The following range options are available:
•
750 ft
•
750 ft and 1500 ft
•
1500 ft and 0.5 nm
•
0.5 nm and 1 nm
•
1 and 2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
NOTE: ADS-B traffic can be displayed as an overlay to navigation maps. Refer to the previous TAS/TCAS I
INDEX
APPENDICES
discussions for information about these additional traffic displays.
338
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
TEST MODE
ADS-B: AIRB
None
ADS-B: SURF
None
ABS-B Traffic Off
ADS-B: OFF
ADS-B TRFC OFF
ADS-B Traffic Not
Available
ADS-B: N/A
NO TRK/HDG
ADS-B Failed*
ADS-B: FAIL
ADS-B TRFC FAIL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADS-B: TEST
ADS-B System Test
Initiated
ADS-B Operating in
Airborne Mode
ADS-B Operating in
Surface Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
EIS
Traffic Map Page Center
Banner Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
ADS-B Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* See Table 6-30 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-29 ADS-B Modes
Description
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
AFCS
Traffic Map Page Center
Annunciation
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the ‘Map - Traffic
Map’ Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
Table 6-30 Traffic Failure Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE
EIS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending).
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-31 Traffic Status Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Additional information about the status of ADS-B traffic products is available on the ‘AUX - ADS-B Status’
Page.
Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘AUX - ADS-B Status’ Page.
INDEX
Figure 6-82 Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status on ADS-B Status Page
340
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Available to Run
Not Available
Fault
Not Configured
TIS-B/ADS-R Coverage
GPS Status: GPS
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground Uplink Status:
Last Uplink
---------------Available
Not Available
--------------External #1
External #2
--------Number of minutes, or
‘------’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic application is currently on. Required input data is available, and it meets
performance requirements.
Traffic application is not currently active, but application is ready to run when
condition(s) determine the application should be active. Required input data is
available, and it meets performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is available, but it does
not meet performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is not available or the
application has failed.
Traffic application is not available, because it has not been configured. If this
annunciation persists, the system should be serviced.
Traffic application status is invalid or unknown.
The system is receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
The system is not receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
ADS-R coverage is invalid or unknown.
The GTX 345R is using the #1 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GTX 345R is using the #2 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GPS source is invalid or unknown.
Displays the number of minutes since the last uplink from a ground station
occurred. If no uplink has been received, or the status is invalid, dashes appear
instead of a number of minutes.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On
EIS
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Status Message
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADS-B Status Page
Item
Traffic Application
Status: Airborne
(AIRB), Surface (SURF),
Airborne Alerts (CSA)
Table 6-32 AUX-ADS-B Status Page Messages for ADS-B Traffic
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
341
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
342
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot Operating Handbook (POH) for the installed autopilot.
7.1 S-TEC FIFTY FIVE X AUTOPILOT (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODE ANNUNCIATION
EIS
NOTE: Only the additional ‘FD’ mode annunciation that may appear in the G950 AFCS Status Box is discussed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
below. This mode annunciation is not analogous to both the G950 and the S-TEC Fifty Five X. Refer to the
approved S-TEC Fifty Five X Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for comprehensive list of annunciations and
operating instructions.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In addition to the redundant status/mode annunciations and/or visual representations that are simultaneously
displayed on both the G950 (AFCS Status Box and/or PFD) and the S-TEC Fifty Five X (Autopilot Display and/
or Remote Annunciator Display), the G950 displays an additional mode annunciation of ‘FD’ when the Flight
Director Mode is engaged.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
343
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Blank Page
344
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, IFR/VFR, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
another source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
• SafeTaxi diagrams
• SiriusXM® Satellite Radio entertainment
EIS
• ChartView, FliteCharts, and IFR/VFR electronic • Flight Data Logging
charts
• Electronic Checklists
• Airport Directory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 1300 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
The optional ChartView, FliteCharts and IFR/VFR electronic charts provides on-board electronic terminal
procedures charts. Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Airport Directory offers detailed information for a selected airport, such as available services, hours of
operation, and lodging options.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL® 69A SXM Data Link Receiver
handles more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment
choices and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD™ data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
Electronic checklists allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure for a particular phase of flight.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SAFETAXI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• PFD Maps
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NDB Information Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
346
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Taxiway
Identification
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft
Position
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport
Features
Detail Softkey
Removes
Taxiway
Markings
AFCS
Figure 8-1 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Detail Softkey (declutter) label advances to Detail All, Detail 3, Detail 2 and Detail 1 each time the
softkey is selected for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the Detail All Softkey removes the taxiway
markings and airport feature labels. Pressing the Detail 3 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol,
and intersection names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the Detail 2 Softkey removes the airport runway
layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the Detail 1 Softkey cycles back to
the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Map Settings’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Aviation’ Group options to SafeTaxi.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page.
348
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.2 CHARTS
Electronic charts that resemble the paper versions of terminal procedures charts (FliteCharts) and Jeppesen®
terminal procedures charts (ChartView) can be displayed on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the databases for both chart types are purchased and loaded in the system, the desired charts brand, or
source, can be selected for viewing. The active chart source for a particular procedure is shown on the information
pane under Source.
Selecting Preferred Charts Source:
EIS
1) While viewing a chart press the MENU Softkey to display the ‘Page Menu’ options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ menu option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the ‘Preferred Charts Source’ option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the available options (FliteCharts, ChartView).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preferred Charts Source Option
Chart Setup Option
AFCS
Figure 8-2 Preferred Charts Source
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Chart Source
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-3 Chart Source
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHARTVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
in full color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the
planview of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes are not considered within the chart boundaries.
Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol is removed
from the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The following figure shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading
is for illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale
areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of
this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the
aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview,
not to the off-scale area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inset Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Area
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Off-Scale
Areas
Figure 8-4 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
APPENDICES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
INDEX
• Approaches
350
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, ‘NRST-Nearest Airport’ Page, or ‘FPL-Active Flight Plan’ Page,
press the Charts Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Options’ Menu to Charts.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map Page Options Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-5 Option Menus
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner Chart Not Available appears on the screen.
The Chart Not Available banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability of a
particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-6 Chart Not Available Banner
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the
banner Unable To Display Chart is then displayed.
INDEX
Figure 8-7 Unable To Display Chart Banner
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
351
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available by pressing the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing
the Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
EIS
The chart shown is one associated with the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
Selecting a chart:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, ‘FPL-Active Flight Plan’ Page, or ‘NRST-Nearest Airports’ Page,
press the Charts Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the ‘WPT-Airport Information’
Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the ‘Approach’ Box. (Press the APR
Softkey if the ‘Approach’ Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Approach’ Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
Chart Scale
Figure 8-8 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
352
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While the Approaches Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. Once the desired chart
is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within the
boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If
the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The Aircraft Not
Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
EIS
Pressing the Chart Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey switches between the Gainesville, FL (KGNV) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If
the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey has no effect. The aircraft position is
shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within the chart boundaries.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Another source for additional airport information is from the Info Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey. When the Info Box is selected using the
FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering information;
the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and Airline
Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft
Current
Position
APPENDICES
Figure 8-9 Airport Information Page, Info View, Full Screen Width
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
In the example shown in following figure, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart.
353
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-10 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from Info View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
- Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
- Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
AFCS
- Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such
as METAR and TAF from the SiriusXM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available
only when a SiriusXM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When
NOTAMS are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled. The NOTAM
Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections. Pressing the
NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
APPENDICES
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
NOTE: Only NOTAMs applicable to specific information conveyed on the displayed Jeppesen chart are
INDEX
available when the NOTAM Softkey is pressed. There may be other NOTAMs available pertaining to the flight
that may not be displayed. Contact Jeppesen for more information regarding Jeppesen database published
NOTAMs.
354
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT Opt Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
Pressing the All Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-11 Approach Information Page, All View
- Pressing the Header Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
AFCS
- Pressing the Plan Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
- Pressing the Profile Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Pressing the Minimums Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
- If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the Fit WDTH Softkey changes
the chart size to fit the available screen width.
- Pressing the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting Additional Information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the Full SCN Softkey to display the information windows (Airport,
Info).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Airport, Info, Runways, or Frequencies Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Info Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys. The full screen
view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the ‘Full Screen’ and ‘Color Scheme’ Options.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the ‘On’ and ‘Off’ ‘Full Screen’ Options.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-12 Page Menus
356
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a
dark environment. When the Chart Setup Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-13 Page Menu Chart Setup
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the ‘Color Scheme’ Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, and ‘Night’ Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
357
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-14 Arrival Information Page, Day View
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-15 Arrival Information Page, Night View
FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are
displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. These charts will display an
Aircraft Not Shown Icon in the lower right corner of the MFD.
Figure 8-16 Aircraft Not Shown Icon
358
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area depicted on some charts. Off-scale areas are
indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on the published chart. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of
this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the
aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview,
not to the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Airport Diagrams
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Area
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Off-Scale
Areas
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Off-Scale
Area
APPENDICES
Figure 8-17 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
359
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the Charts Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT Opt, Chart, Info, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and Go
Back. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the Go Back Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT Opt Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: All, Fit WDTH, Full SCN, and Back.
EIS
While viewing the CHRT Opt Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, ‘NRST-Nearest Airport’ Page, or ‘FPL-Active Flight Plan’ Page,
press the Charts Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Options’ Menu to ‘Charts.’
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner No Available Charts appears on the screen.
The No Available Charts banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability of a
particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-18 No Available Charts Banner
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the
banner Unable To Display Chart is then displayed.
INDEX
Figure 8-19 Unable To Display Chart Banner
360
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by pressing the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing
the Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, ‘FPL-Active Flight Plan’ Page, or ‘NRST-Nearest Airports’ Page,
press the Charts Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the ‘WPT-Airport Information’
Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the ‘Approach’ Box. (Press the APR
Softkey if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Approach’ Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AFCS
While the Approach Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. Once the desired chart
is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE,
and the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the Chart Softkey switches between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey switches between the Gainesville, FL (KGNV) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page.
APPENDICES
Pressing the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart.
If the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey has no effect.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Another source for additional airport information is from the Info Box above the chart or to the right of the
chart for certain airports. This information source is not related to the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey. When the Info
Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the ENT Key displays the IFR Alternate Minimums Chart.
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
EIS
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data if a data link weather receiver is installed.
Selecting Additional Information:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Info’ Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Info’ Box choices. When the ‘Info’ Box is selected the softkeys are blank.
If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to
complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the Go Back Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT Opt Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level.
Pressing the All Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
AFCS
Pressing the Fit WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
Pressing the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
APPENDICES
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the ‘Full Screen’ and ‘Color Scheme’ Options.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the ‘On’ and ‘Off’ Full Screen Options.
362
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a
dark environment. When the Chart Setup Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu ‘Options.’
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the ‘Color Scheme’ Option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, and ‘Night’ Options.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu.
IFR/VFR CHARTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system can display GPS navigation information on a VFR chart, a low altitude IFR chart, or a high altitude
IFR chart, if installed. The information overlaid on the IFR/VFR Charts is selected and setup on the Navigation
Map, but the IFR/VFR charts will not display some of the selected items. Only the following items will be
overlaid on the chart:
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AFCS
• Map Pointer (distance and bearing to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent information)
• Map Range (17 range choices from 1 nm to 150 nm)
• Map Orientation (always North Up for IFR/VFR Charts)
• Aircraft Icon (representing present position)
• Wind Direction and Speed
• Icons for enabled map features (Traffic only)
• Flight Plan Legs
• Track Vector
• Runway Extension
• Missed Approach Preview
• Intersections (only as part of active flight plan)
• Visual Reporting Points
• VNAV Constraints
• Selected Altitude Intercept Arc
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Map panning on the IFR/VFR Charts works the same as on the Navigation Map. Map range selected on either
the Navigation Map or the IFR/VFR Charts applies to both. However, if the range selected on the Navigation
Map it is not a valid chart range, the chart is shown with a range of 7.5 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When different VFR charts exist for the same area the chart type will automatically display according to the
range chosen. For example, in an area where both a Sectional and a Terminal Area Chart (TAC) are available,
a range of 10 nm or more will show the Sectional chart. Once the range is decreased below 10 nm, the system
will automatically change the displayed chart from the Sectional to the TAC.
EIS
Due to the potential error involved with the electronic depiction of maps, charts will display a ‘gray circle of
uncertainty’ centered upon the aircraft icon. The aircraft’s actual position can be anywhere within the range of
the gray circle. The range of the circle will change based on the chart displayed and current zoom range.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. IFR/VFR charts may be viewed
by selecting the ‘Map - IFR/VFR Charts’ Page.
Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Orientation
VFR Chart
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
AFCS
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-20 GPS Navigation Information on the VFR Chart
Selecting IFR Low, IFR High, VFR Charts:
Select the ‘Map - IFR/VFR Charts’ Page.
APPENDICES
1) Press the VFR, IFR Low, or IFR High Softkey to display the desired chart.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
2) Select ‘Display VFR’, ‘Display IFR Low’ or ‘Display IFR High’ to display the desired chart.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key.
364
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
IFR Low Altitude
Chart
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
EIS
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-21 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR Low Altitude Chart
Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Orientation
IFR High Altitude
Chart
Map Range
AFCS
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
APPENDICES
Figure 8-22 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR High Altitude Chart
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AIRPORT DIRECTORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association™ (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information
is viewed on the Airport Information Page by pressing the Info Softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Airport Information Page. Initially, information for the airport closest to
the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) If necessary, press the Info softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
Modifying IFR chart settings:
1) Press the MENU Key with the IFR Low / IFR High Chart displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Settings’ option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Color Scheme’ setting.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, or ‘Night’. The IFR/VFR Chart display changes to reflect the setting.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) If ‘Auto’ was selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the backlight threshold field (sets value for automatic
day/night switching).
INDEX
Figure 8-23 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
366
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.3 DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISIONS
CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Databases that may be available include FliteCharts, Obstacle, Terrain, IFR/VFR, Navigation, ChartView,
SafeTaxi, Airport Directory. Data is revised and expiration dates vary. Data is still viewable during a period that
extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page
displays the current status of the databases. As an example, see the table below for the various FliteCharts
Power-up Page displays and the definition of each. The expiration date and disables date varies for each database.
EIS
Example Power-up Page Display Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 8-1 Database Power-up Page Annunciations
White text, such as ‘FliteCharts Data Expires’ plus a date, indicates the chart database is current. Yellow text,
such as ‘Chart data is out of date!’ or ‘FliteCharts Data: Disabled”, indicates charts are no longer viewable and
have expired.
AFCS
Database time critical information can also be found on the ‘Aux - System Status’ page. The database Region,
Cycle number, Effective, Expires, and Disables dates of the subscription appear in either blue or yellow text.
Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not within the current
subscription period.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
APPENDICES
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the Database window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the applicable database information is shown.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Database cycle numbers are in a format such as YYTI or YYII, which are deciphered as follows:
YYTI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
T – Indicates the database type (ex. S is for SafeTaxi, D is for Airport Directory)
I – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 5 is the fifth issue of the year)
YYII
EIS
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
II – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 05 is the fifth issue of the year)
Revision Cycle
28 days
YYMI
Not Applicable
YYTI
Not Applicable
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Example Power-up Page Display Text
YYBI
56 days
YYSI
56 days
YYDI
56 days
YYII
28 days
YYII
14 days
YYII
28 days
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Database Cycle Number Format
YYII
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix for instructions on revising databases.
INDEX
Table 8-2 Database Cycle Number and Revision
368
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.4 SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver is available
for the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A SXM can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
services at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S.
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A SXM.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send
an activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A SXM, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the ‘Aux - XM Radio’ Page.
4) Press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
EIS
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
Audio
Radio ID
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Data
Radio ID
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Weather
Products
Window
AFCS
Figure 8-24 XM Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If SiriusXM Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM
Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data
Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
APPENDICES
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
INDEX
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) Press the Radio Softkey to show the ‘Aux - XM Radio’ Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
370
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, press the Channel Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the ‘Channels’ Box, or move down the list with the
CH – Softkey.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Selecting a channel directly:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) While on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, press the Channel Softkey.
2) Press the Direct CH Softkey. The channel number in the ‘Active Channel’ Box is highlighted.
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CATEGORY
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is Presets to view channels that have been programmed.
AFCS
Selecting a category:
1) Press the Category Softkey on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
APPENDICES
PRESETS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the Presets and More Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to the
channel list for the Presets category.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting a preset channel number:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
2) Press the More Softkey to access the next five channels (Preset 6 – Preset 10), and again to access the
last five channels (Preset 11 – Preset 15). Pressing the More Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset
channels.
1) On the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, while listening to an ‘Active Channel’ that is wanted for a preset, press the
Presets Softkey to access the first five preset channels (Preset 1 - Preset 5).
3) Press any one of the (Preset 1 - Preset 15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
4) Press the Set Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
EIS
Pressing the Back Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top level softkeys.
VOLUME
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by pressing the Volume Softkey, which
brings up the Mute Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) With the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page displayed, press the Volume Softkey.
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
Muting SiriusXM audio:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page or ‘Aux-XM Information’ Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Press the Mute Softkey to mute the audio. Press the Mute Softkey again to unmute the audio.
372
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.5 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
EIS
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the ‘Aux-Utility’ Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the system is capable of logging.
• CDI Deflection (0.0 to 1.0)
• VDI Deflection (0.0 to 1.0)
• Normal Acceleration (g)
• Heading (degrees magnetic)
• Course (deg)
• Wind Direction (degrees mag.)
• Wind Speed (kts)
• Gnd Trk (degrees magnetic)
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• Fuel Press. (psi)
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Engine Speed (rpm)
• Power (%)
• Torque (ft. lbs.)
• Np (rpm)
• Ng (%)
• ITT (deg. C)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
190-02286-00 Rev. A
• Roll Commanded (degrees)
• OAT (deg. C)
• True Airspeed (kts)
• Selected Vertical Speed (fpm)
• Vertical Speed (fpm)
• HSI Selection (GPS,NAV1/2)
• GPS Fix (e.g. 2D, 3D, 3DDiff)
• Indicated Airspeed (kts)
• Horizontal Alert Limit (HAL,
meters)
• Gnd Speed (kts)
• Vertical Alert Limit (VAL, meters)
• Vertical Speed (fpm)
• NAV1 Frequency (MHz)
• NAV2 Frequency (MHz)
• Horizontal Protection Level
(HPLWAS, meters)
• Pitch (degrees)
• Roll (degrees)
• Horizontal Protection Level
(HPLFD, meters)
• Vertical
Protection
Level
(VPLWAS, meters)
• COM1 Frequency (MHz)
• COM2 Frequency (MHz)
• Lateral Acceleration (g)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Local Date (YYYY-MM-DD)
• Local Time (HH:MM:SS)
• Active Waypoint Distance (nm)
• Active
Waypoint
Bearing
(degrees mag.)
• UTC Offset (HH:MM)
• Mag. Variation (degrees)
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Voltage 1 (volts)
• Voltage 2 (volts)
• Amps 1 (amps)
• Amps 2 (amps)
• AFCS On ( 0 – false, 1 – true)
• Latitude (degrees)
• AFCS Roll Mode (e.g. HDG,
LOC, GPS, VOR, ROL)
• Longitude (degrees)
• Right Fuel Qty (gals or lbs)
• Left Fuel Qty (gals or lbs)
• Center Fuel Qty (gals or lbs)
• AFCS Pitch Mode (e.g. ALT, GS,
GP, VS)
• Barometric Altitude (feet)
• Altimeter Setting (in. Hg.)
• GPS Altitude (ft)
• Pitch Commanded (degrees)
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in the following figure. This file can be
imported into most computer spreadsheet applications.
Local Date
YYMMDD
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
EIS
log_170610_104506_KIXD.csv
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-25 Log File Format
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Data logging status can be monitored on the ‘Aux-Utility’ Page.
374
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.6 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The optional checklists presented here are for example only and may differ from checklists available
for the airframe. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the checklist information
described in the POH or the Pilot Safety and Warning Supplements document.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the aircraft
EIS
manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit these checklists.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure
on the ground and during each phase of flight. The system accesses the checklists from an SD card inserted into
the bezel slot. If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no checklist, the Power-up Page messages display
‘Checklist File: Invalid’ or ‘Checklist File: N/A’ (not available) and the Checklist Softkey is not available.
Accessing and navigating checklists:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the Checklist Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Group’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Checklist’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key. The selected checklist item is
indicated with white text surrounded by a white box.
6) Press the ENT Key or Check Softkey to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green and a
checkmark is placed in the associated box. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.
AFCS
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
Press the CLR Key or Uncheck Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
8) Press the ENT Key. ‘Go To Next Checklist?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
9) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
APPENDICES
10) Press the Exit Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
375
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Accessing emergency procedures:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
2) Press the EMER Softkey.
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the Checklist Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired emergency checklist and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key or Check Softkey to check the selected emergency checklist item. The line item turns green
and a checkmark is placed in the box next to it. The next line item is automatically highlighted for checking.
EIS
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
Press the CLR Key or Uncheck Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘Go To Next Checklist?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
7) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the Return Softkey to return to the previous checklist.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) Press the Exit Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
376
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
SIRIUSXM DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page for
GDL 69A SXM status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69A SXM the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Ensure the installed Data Link Receiver or Iridium Transceiver has an active subscription or account
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver or
Iridium Transceiver
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Ensure that nothing is plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks because that would prevent SiriusXM
radio from being heard
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
Message Location
CHECK ANTENNA
XM Information Page (MFD)
UPDATING
XM Information Page (MFD)
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service
required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
XM Information Page Weather Datalink Page Loss of signal; signal strength too low for
(MFD)
receiver
NO SIGNAL
Acquiring channel audio or information
OFF AIR
XM Radio Page (MFD)
Channel not in service
--------
XM Radio Page (MFD)
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
XM Information Page (MFD)
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
within last 5 minutes
SiriusXM subscription is not activated
DETECTING ACTIVATION
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
XM Radio Page (MFD)
AFCS
LOADING
SiriusXM subscription is activating.
SiriusXM subscription confirmed downloading
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
weather data.
Table 8-3 GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver Messages
APPENDICES
WAITING FOR DATA...
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Message
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
377
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Blank Page
378
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
NOTE: The P2006T aircraft Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) supersedes information found in this
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
document.
The Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
• CAS Window: The CAS Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text color is based on alert levels
described in the following section. The CAS Window is located to the right of the Altimeter and Vertical Speed
Indicator. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of the window.
EIS
• Messages Window: The Messages Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized system messages.
Pressing the Messages Softkey displays the Messages Window. Pressing the Messages Softkey a second time
removes the Messages Window from the display. When the Messages Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can
be used to scroll through the system message list.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the Messages Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation
to accompany an alert. The Messages Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level (Warning
or Caution). By pressing the softkey when flashing an annunciation, the alert is acknowledged and the alert
window text can be viewed in the ‘Messages’ Window. The softkey label then returns to Messages. If alerts are
still present, the Messages label is displayed in white with black text.
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red or amber ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is
supplied by a failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the System Overview Section for more information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
System
Annunciation
(Red ‘X’)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System
Annunciation
(Amber ‘X’)
EIS
CAS
Window
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Messages
Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-1 Alerting System
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CAS MESSAGE PRIORITIZATION
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for corrective pilot actions.
NOTE: Any CAS messages that are generated when the system is first powered on are considered already
acknowledged. They do not flash or trigger the Warning or Caution softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Alerting System uses four alert levels. Messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory,
and safe operating) and sorted by order of appearance (most recent messages on top). The color of the message
is based on its urgency and on required action: If a GEA or GIA fails, all CAS messages depending on sensors
associated with that LRU are automatically inhibited. Inhibits cannot be activated by invalid sensor data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Crew Alerting System (CAS) Window is located on the right side of the PFD. Warning messages cannot
be scrolled through and remain at the top of the CAS display. The scroll bar appears if more messages exist
than can be displayed at once or if messages have been scrolled off the display. The CAS scrolling softkeys also
become available.
380
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CAS
Window
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CAS
Scrollbar
EIS
Figure A-2 CAS Message Prioritization
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Warning: This level of alert requires immediate attention. When a new warning CAS message appears in the
CAS Window, it flashes (inversely red on white) in conjunction with the Warning Softkey (see Figure A-5) and
is accompanied by a repeating triple chime. Pressing the Warning Softkey acknowledges all flashing warning
messages and extinguishes the softkey. Once acknowl edged, warning messages are shown in red text and are
displayed until the issue is corrected. Warning Message text may be viewed in the Messages Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CAS Scrolling
Softkeys
Softkey
Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Caution: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require
intervention. When a new caution message appears in the CAS Window, it is shown in black on amber inverse
video in conjunction with the Caution Softkey (see Figure A-5) and is accompanied by a double chime.
Pressing the Caution Softkey Indicator acknowledges all amber messages and extinguishes the softkey. Once
acknowledged, caution messages are displayed until the issue is corrected. Caution Message text may be viewed
in the Messages Window.
AFCS
Advisory: This level of alert provides general information. When a new white advisory appears on the CAS
display, it is shown in black on white inverse video. No aural tone in generated Advisory Message text may be
viewed in the Messages Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Safe Operating Annunciations: This level of alert provides general information about conditions which are
safe for operation. Safe operating annunciation alert text is shown in green in the Annunciation Window. Safe
Operating Message text may be viewed in the Messages Window.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
CAS
Window
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CAS
Window
EIS
Messages
Window
Softkey
Annunciation
(After
acknowledgement)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkey
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure A-3 CAS Message Prioritization
Figure A-4 CAS Message Prioritization
Figure A-5 Softkey Annunciation (Message Softkey Labels)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CAS ANNUNCIATIONS
The following alerts are configured specifically for the the P2006T aircraft. See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook
(POH) for information regarding pilot responses.
AFCS
WARNING ALERTS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CAS Window Text
FLAPS OVERSPEED
GEAR OVERSPEED
LH CT HIGH
LH FIRE
LH FUEL PRESS HIGH
LH LOW COOLANT
LH OIL PRESSURE HIGH
LH OIL TEMP HIGH
LH OVERVOLTAGE
LH RPM HIGH
PILOT DOOR OPEN
REAR DOOR OPEN
382
Window Message
Airspeed higher than recommended for current flap position
Airspeed higher than recommended for current gear position
Left engine coolant temperature is high
Left engine fire
Left engine fuel pressure is high
Left engine coolant temperature low
Left engine oil pressure is high
Left engine oil temperature high
Left engine voltage is high
Left engine RPMs are high
Pilot door is open
Rear door is open
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Window Message
Right engine coolant temperature is high
Right engine fire
Right engine fuel pressure is high
Right engine coolant temperature is low
Right engine oil pressure is high
Right engine oil temperature high
Right engine voltage is high voltage is high
Right engine RPMs are high
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
CAS Window Text
RH CT HIGH
RH FIRE
RH FUEL PRESS HIGH
RH LOW COOLANT
RH OIL PRESSURE HIGH
RH OIL TEMP HIGH
RH OVERVOLTAGE
RH RPM HIGH
CAUTION ALERTS
Window Message
Landing gear hydraulic pump active
Left engine alternator has failed
Pitot heater has failed
Right engine alternator has failed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CAS Window Text
LANDING GEAR PUMP ON
LH ALT FAIL
PITOT HEAT FAIL
RH ALT FAIL
ADVISORY ALERTS
Window Message
External Power is connected to the aircraft
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CAS Window Text
EXT POWER ON
SAFE OPERATING ANNUNCIATIONS
Window Message
Left auxiliary fuel pump is active
Pitot heat is active
Right auxiliary fuel pump is active
AFCS
CAS Window Text
LH FUEL PUMP ON
PITOT HEAT ON
RH FUEL PUMP ON
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SYSTEM MESSAGES
APPENDICES
System Messages Advisories convey messages to the flight crew regarding problems with the system. When
a new message is issued, the Messages Softkey assumes the label Message and flashes to alert the flight crew.
It continues to flash until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. The softkey then returns to its previous
Messages label. Pressing the Messages Softkey removes the Messages Window from the display. Active
messages are displayed in the Messages window in white text. Messages that have become inactive change to
gray text. The Messages Softkey flashes again and assumes the Message label if the state of a displayed message
changes or a new message is displayed. Typically, a large red or amber ‘X’ appears in a window when a related
LRU fails or detects invalid data.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Messages
Window
Message Annunciation
(Prior to softkey being
pressed)
Messages Annunciation
(After softkey is
pressed)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure A-6 Message/Messages Softkey Annunciation
SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
NOTE: This section provides information regarding message advisories that may be displayed by the system.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must be
considered when responding to a message.
This section describes various system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or LRU
function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red or amber ‘X’ annunciation
as shown previously in the System Message Annunciations section.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Message Advisory
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
ADC1 SERVICE – ADC1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
AHRS1 CAL – AHRS1 calibration version
error. Srvc req’d.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
any GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
384
Comments
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
The GDC1 should be serviced..
The #1 AHRS calibration version error. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be
serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less
than 10 minutes.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.
Use LNAV minima when approach is downgraded.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
10 minutes.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
190-02286-00 Rev. A
EIS
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
than 2 nm.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ahead.
APR INACTV – Approach is not active. The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate approach
when required.
AUDIO MANIFEST - Audio software
The GIA 63W has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
degrees.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The system should be
module is inoperative.
serviced.
COM1 CONFIG – COM1 config error. The COM1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
Config service req’d.
system system should be serviced
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key The COM1 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position.
is stuck.
Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
The COM1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer key is stuck.
transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
The system has detected a failure in COM1. COM1 may still be usable. The system
service. Return unit for repair.
should be serviced when possible.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1. The transmitter
Reducing transmitter power.
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
COM2 CONFIG – COM2 config error. The COM2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
Config service req’d.
system should be serviced
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key The COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position.
is stuck.
Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
The COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer key is stuck.
transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
The system has detected a failure in COM2. COM2 may still be usable. The system
service. Return unit for repair.
should be serviced when possible.
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
Comments
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM2. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify that the
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
Verify stored airways.
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation
The PFD and MFD have different navigation database versions or types installed.
database mismatch. Xtalk is off.
Crossfill is off. Check the Aux-Databases Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the Aux-System Status Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions or types installed.
mismatch.
Check the Aux-Databases Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check the
Aux-Databases Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Standby Navigation The PFD and MFD have different standby navigation database versions or types
database mismatch.
installed. Check the Aux-Databases Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check
the Aux-Databases Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions or types installed. Check
mismatch.
the Aux-System Status Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check the AuxDatabases Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
FAILED PATH – A data path has
A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63W has failed.
failed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
truncated.
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This
is locked.
occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The
flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also
occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
OR
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The system should be serviced.
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The receiver may still be
Return unit for repair.
available. The system should be serviced when possible.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The system should be serviced.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The receiver may still be
Return unit for repair.
available. The system should be serviced when possible.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
Verify user modified procedures.
386
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
The GDC 72 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GDL 69A SXM configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69A SXM. The receiver is unavailable. The
system system should be serviced.
The 69A SXM has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The GEA 71 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
EIS
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The GEA 71 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
flagged as invalid.
Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
The GIA1 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The GIA1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
AFCS
The GIA1 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The GIA1 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The GIA1 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should be serviced.
The GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be serviced.
The GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
The GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to warm up to
operating temperature.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Comments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GDL69 MANIFEST – GDL software
mismatch, communication halted.
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GEA1 MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GEA2 CONFIG – GEA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GEA2 MANIFEST – GEA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/
South, no magnetic compass.
GFC MANIFEST – GFC software
mismatch, communication halted.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA1 MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA2 MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
GDC1 MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
The GIA2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
EIS
GMA1 MANIFEST – GMA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GMA XTALK – GMA crosstalk error
has occurred.
GMU1 MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GRS1 MANIFEST – GRS1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GSR1 FAIL – GSR1 has failed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GTS CONFIG – GTS config error.
Config service req’d.
GTS MANIFEST – GTS software
mismatch, communication halted.
GTX MANIFEST – GTX software
mismatch, communication halted.
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
388
Comments
The GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should be serviced.
The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may
still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The system should be serviced
when possible.
An error has occurred in transferring data between the two GMAs. The system should
be serviced.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GSR 56. The transceiver is unavailable. The system
should be serviced.
GTS 800 configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
system should be serviced.
The GTS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified MFD. The SD card
needs to be reinserted.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified MFD contains invalid data.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified MFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the display.
If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the Airport Directory database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
AFCS
The MFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The MFD detected a failure in the ChartView database (optional feature). Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. data card. If problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional feature). Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in more than one database. If problem persists, the
system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to reload the
navigation database. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the data card
is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
INDEX
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
APPENDICES
190-02286-00 Rev. A
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified MFD contains invalid data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 multiple
database errors exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts
database error exists.
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
EIS
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MFD1 CARD 1 ERR – Card 1 is
invalid.
MFD1 CARD 1 REM – Card 1 was
removed. Reinsert card.
MFD1 CARD 2 ERR – Card 2 is
invalid.
MFD1 CARD 2 REM – Card 2 was
removed. Reinsert card.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Airport
Directory database error exists.
Comments
Data link avionics were not configured correctly and therefore will not be able to
communicate with the ground network.
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
LRG MAG VAR – Verify all course
angles.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
INVALID ADM – Invalid ADM: ATN
communication halted.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
locked flight plan.
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
EIS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD1 [key name]
is stuck.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
AFCS
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NON WGS84 WPT – Do not use GPS
for navigation to [xxxx]
Comments
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the data card
is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The MFD voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
The remote NAV1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) state. Press
the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
The system should be serviced.
The remote NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) state. Press
the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
The system should be serviced.
The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS to
navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint..
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD contains invalid data.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD. The SD card
needs to be reinserted.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD contains invalid data.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified PFD. The SD card
needs to be reinserted.
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The PFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the display.
If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
PFD1 CARD 1 ERR – Card 1 is invalid.
PFD1 CARD 1 REM – Card 1 was
removed. Reinsert card.
PFD1 CARD 2 ERR – Card 2 is invalid.
PFD1 CARD 2 REM – Card 2 was
removed. Reinsert card.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
The PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
database error exists.
390
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Comments
The PFD detected a failure in more than one database. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The PFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to reload the
navigation database. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
A key is stuck on the PFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The PFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
The PFD1 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
Bad parallel track geometry.
Message criteria entered by the user.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the Avionics Settings Screen
to Magnetic.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the Avionics Settings Screen
to True.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Stormscope has failed. The system should be serviced.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
installed terrain database.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (4.9 arcsecond or better) is not currently installed.
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] is
stuck.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
invalid leg type.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
bad geometry.
SCHEDULER [#] – <message>.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
SLCT MAG– Select MAGNETIC NAV
ANGLE display units.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
SLCT NON-MAG– Select alternate
NAV ANGLE display units.
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has
failed.
SVT DISABLED – Out of available
terrain region.
SVT DISABLED – Terrain DB
resolution too low.
EIS
The PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the data card is
properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
The PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database error exists.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 multiple
database errors exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1
navigation database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
SYSTEM CONFIG – SYSTEM config
error. Config service req’d.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
failed.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current
vertical waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VNV UNAVAILABLE. – Excessive
crosstrack error.
VNV UNAVAILABLE. – Excessive track
angle error.
VNV UNAVAILABLE. – Parallel course
selected.
VNV UNAVAILABLE. – Unsupported
leg type in flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
-[xxxx]
XPDR1 ADS-B 1090 – Datalink:
ADS-B 1090 receiver has failed.
XPDR1 ADS-B FAIL – Transponder:
XPDR1 is unable to transmit ADS-B
messages.
XPDR1 ADS-B NO POS –
Transponder: ADS-B is not transmitting
position.
XPDR1 ADS-B TRFC – Transponder:
ADS-B traffic has failed
XPDR1 ADS-B UAT – Datalink:
ADS-B in UAT receiver has failed.
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
XPDR1 CSA FAIL - Traffic: ADS-B In
traffic alerting has failed.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative.
XPDR1 FAULT – Datalink: ADSB-B in
has failed.
XPDR1 FIS-B WX – Datalink: FIS-B
Weather has failed.
392
Comments
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The system should be
serviced.
The system configuration has changed unexpectedly. The system should be serviced.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
The system is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
should be serviced.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
A failure has been detected in the 1090 receiver.
ADS-B is inoperative. The transponder may not be receiving a valid GPS position.
Other transponder functions may be available. Service when possible.
The transponder is not able to receive position information.
The Transponder is incapable of processing traffic information.
A failure has been detected in the UAT receiver.
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
ADS-B Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is unavailable.
There is no communication with the #1 or #2 transponder.
The transponder is unable to receive ADS-B information.
The transponder is unable to receive FIS-B weather information.
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Comments
The system has detected an over temperature condition in XPDR1. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
Unable to provide pressure altitude information.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
The system has detected an under temperature condition in XPDR1. The transmitter
operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The system should be
serviced.
EIS
Message Advisory
XPDR1 OVER TEMP - Transponder:
Transponder over temp.
XPDR1 PRES ALT –Transponder:
ADS-B no pressure altitude.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 UNDER TEMP - Transponder:
Transponder under temp.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
393
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
Blank Page
394
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DATABASE MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Database information is obtained from third party sources. Inaccuracies in the data may be discovered from
time to time. Garmin communicates this information by issuing a Database Alert. These notifications are available
on flygarmin.com.
EIS
Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information. These
discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles and
fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go to
flygarmin.com and select Aviation Data Error Report.
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load various types of data. For basic flight operations, SD cards
are required for database updates. Not all SD cards are compatible with the system.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
power-up screen and the effective date on the Aux – Databases Page being displayed in amber.
LOADING UPDATED DATABASES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ system messages will be displayed until
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
database synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can
be monitored on the Aux-Database Page.
Databases may be loaded through Garmin Pilot and Flight Stream 510. When loading databases through
Garmin Pilot and the Flight Stream 510, it must be enabled on the system and the multimedia card inserted in
the bottom SD slot of the MFD.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The cycles and dates for both standby and active databases are displayed on the “Aux – Databases” page on
the MFD. Any active databases with expiration dates in the past will be highlighted with amber text. When
an expired active database has a standby database that is ready to become effective, a cyan double-sided arrow
will be displayed between the database cycles. When this arrow is visible, it indicates that the standby and
active databases in that row will be switched on the next power cycle, activating the current standby database.
Databases can also be manually selected (or deselected) by highlighting a list item and pressing the ENT key,
provided a valid, verified standby database is present.
APPENDICES
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
The navigation database contains the aeronautical data used by the system for the flight management and
flight planning functions. Included is detailed data for waypoints, procedures (arrivals, departures, approaches),
and airways. The navigation database is updated every 28 days.
INDEX
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. These databases are updated periodically and have
no expiration date.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
EIS
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S. or
worldwide, respectively. The AOPA Directory offers detailed information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along
with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. These databases are updated every 56 days. The
AC-U-KWIK Directory offers detailed information for more than 8,000 airports with runways longer than 3,000
feet worldwide.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The ChartView database is updated on a 14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70
days of the expiration date, ChartView will no longer function. The ChartView database must be purchased
directly from Jeppesen, but can be updated at jeppesen.com or flygarmin.com.
AFCS
The IFR/VFR charts database contains VFR and IFR raster charts. The VFR Charts are digital representations
of the Sectional Aeronautical Charts and Terminal Area Charts. The IFR Charts include both IFR High (designed
for navigation at or above 18,000 ft) and IFR Low (designed for navigation below 18,000 ft). IFR/VFR Charts
are updated every 28 days except for Canadian IFR/VFR Charts which are updated every 56 days.
Database Updates Using a Supplemental Data Card
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
All databases are updated through a single SD card in the bottom slot of the MFD. When the card is
inserted, the databases on the card will be copied to standby and synchronized across all powered, configured
units. After update, the card is removed and the databases are stored on the system. When in standby,
databases are not immediately available for use, but stored to be activated at a later time.
APPENDICES
Database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation Databases’ section
of the Garmin website (flygarmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded from the website, a
PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new databases onto an
existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer
INDEX
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
• Supplemental SD Cards
396
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Updating Databases using an SD Card:
1) With the system OFF, remove an SD Card from the bottom SD card slot of the MFD.
2) Download the databases and install them on an SD card.
3) Put the SD Card in the bottom SD card slot of the MFD.
EIS
4) Turn the system ON.
5) Press the ENT Key or the right most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the startup screen.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Database page group on the MFD.
8) Monitor the Sync Status on the Database page. Wait for all databases to complete syncing, indicated by ‘Sync
Complete’ being displayed. A cyan double arrow will appear between the Standby and Active columns to show
which Standby databases will be transferred to Active at the next power cycle.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure B-1 Databases Page before Activation of Standby Databases
APPENDICES
9) Verify the correct database cycle information is shown in the Standby Database column.
10) Remove power from the system.
11) Remove the SD card from the bottom slot of the MFD.
12) After restarting the system, turn the large FMS Knob and select the Aux page group on the MFD.
INDEX
13) Turn the small FMS Knob and select the Databases page.
14) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
397
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
Figure B-2 Databases Page with Updated Databases
15) To view database information for an individual display, press and then turn the FMS Knob to select the database,
and then press the Details Softkey. Press the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
16) To manually activate any databases that did not transfer to the active column:
a) Press the FMS Knob. The first database title on the screen will be selected.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob as necessary to select the database title.
AFCS
c) Press the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby database will become
active.
d) Remove and reapply power to the system.
e) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Database Updates Using Flight Stream 510
APPENDICES
In order to load databases through Garmin Pilot and the Flight Stream 510, the Flight Stream 510 must
be enabled on the system with the Multimedia card inserted in the bottom SD slot of the MFD. A mobile
device with Garmin Pilot must be paired with the Flight Stream 510 over Bluetooth (refer to the Additional
Features section). When there is at least one paired device available to connect, the Flight Stream 510 will
automatically connect to the system’s preferred mobile device. The preferred device can be selected on the
Aux – Databases page from a menu list of paired devices.
INDEX
Once a connection to the paired mobile device is made, Garmin Pilot makes available databases that
can be transferred to the Flight Stream 510. If any of these databases is more recent than the respective
standby database on the system, (or if there is no standby database on the system) those databases will be
automatically selected to load. The database updates may be initiated from the Aux - Databases page, or from
other pages on the MFD.
398
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Updating Databases from any MFD page (except the Aux - Databases page):
1) Insert the Flight Stream Mutimedia Card in the bottom slot of the MFD.
2) Press the Update softkey when the Database Update screen appears.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure B-3 Database Update Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) The Flight Stream 510 will enter WI-FI mode. The following screen will appear.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure B-4 Starting Database Transfer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Put the mobile device in WI-FI mode (refer to the Additional Features section).
5) Connect the mobile device to the Flight Stream 510 WI-FI (refer to the Additional Features section). The ‘WI-FI
Not Connected’ screen will close when the WI-FI connection is established.
6)
When the transfer is complete, the following screen will appear.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure B-5 Database Transfer Complete
APPENDICES
7) Press the Close softkey.
8) When an existing database is expired and a new one is ready to become active, a ‘Database Expired’ window
will appear. Continue to the next step to restart the system.
9) Remove power from the system.
10) After restarting the system, turn the large FMS Knob and select the Aux page group on the MFD.
INDEX
11) Turn the small FMS Knob and select the Databases page.
12) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
399
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure B-6 Databases Page with Updated Databases
13) To view database information for an individual display, press and then turn the FMS Knob to select the database,
and then press the Details Softkey. Press the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
14) To manually activate any databases that did not transfer to the active column:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
a) Press the FMS Knob. The first database title on the screen will be selected.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob as necessary to select the database title.
c) Press the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby database will become
active.
d) Remove and reapply power to the system.
AFCS
e) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
Updating Databases from the Aux - Databases page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the system OFF, insert the Flight Stream Mutimedia Card in the bottom slot of the MFD.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Database page group on the MFD.
4) Press the Device Softkey.
APPENDICES
5) The Aux - Databases page will show the databases connected to the mobile device in place of the active
databases on the system. Databases selected to load will be indicated by a cyan arrow.
6) Press the Update softkey. The Flight Stream 510 will enter WI-FI mode.
7) Put the mobile device in WI-FI mode (refer to the Additional Features section).
INDEX
8) Connect the mobile device to the Flight Stream 510 WI-FI (refer to the Additional Features section).
9) The Database Update status will appear in the Status window at the top of the page.
10) Remove power from the system.
11) After restarting the system, turn the large FMS Knob and select the Aux page group on the MFD.
400
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
12) Turn the small FMS Knob and select the Databases page.
13) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure B-7 Databases Page with Updated Databases
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
14) To view database information for an individual display, press and then turn the FMS Knob to select the database,
and then press the Details Softkey. Press the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
15) To manually activate any databases that did not transfer to the active column:
a) Press the FMS Knob. The first database title on the screen will be selected.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob as necessary to select the database title.
AFCS
c) Press the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby database will become
active.
d) Remove and reapply power to the system.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
e) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the active database column.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX B
MAGNETIC FIELD VARIATION DATABASE UPDATE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A copy of the current magnetic field variation database (MV DB) is included with the navigation database.
At startup, the system compares this version of the MV DB with that presently being used by the AHRS. If the
system determines the MV DB needs to be updated, a prompt is displayed on the Navigation Map Page.
Figure B-8 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loading the magnetic field variation database update:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
With ‘OK’ highlighted, as seen in Figure B-8, press the ENT Key on the MFD. A progress monitor is displayed
as shown in Figure B-9. When the upload is complete, the system is ready for use.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure B-9 Uploading Database
402
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GARMIN AVIATION GLOSSARY
ACARS
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
BOC
BOD
BRG
AFCS
BFO
BKSP
Bluetooth
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Both Runways
Barometric Altitude
Barometer, Barometric
Battery
Backcourse
The compass direction from the present
position to a destination waypoint.
Beat Frequency Oscillator
Backspace
Wireless standard for data exchange over
short distances
Bottom of Climb
Bottom of Descent
see also Bearing
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
B
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
Bearing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot
Autopilot Disconnect
Approach
Airport, Aerodrome
Airport Signs
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
Airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
Arrival
Airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated Surface Observing System
Auto Throttle
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
Along Track
Automatic Sequence
Auxiliary
Average
Aviation VHF Link Control
Automated Weather Observing System
EIS
190-02286-00 Rev. A
AP
AP DISC
APPR, APR
APT
APTSIGNS
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV
AS
ASB
ASOS
AT
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
ATK
AUTOSEQ
AUX
AVG
AVLC
AWOS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airborne Communications Addressing
and Reporting System
ACC
Accuracy
ACT, ACTV
Active, Activate, Altitude Compensated
Tilt
ADAHRS
Air Data, Attitude and Heading Reference
System
ADC
Air Data Computer
ADF
Automatic Direction Finder
ADI
Attitude Direction Indicator
ADIZ
Air Defense Identification Zone
ADS-B
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceBroadcast
ADS-R
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceRebroadcast
AF
Arc to Fix Leg
AFCS
Automatic Flight Control System
AFM
Airplane Flight Manual
AFMS
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
AFRM
Airframe
AGL
Above Ground Level
AHRS
Attitude and Heading Reference System
AIM
Aeronautical Information Manual
AIRB
Airborne
AIRMET
Airman’s Meteorological Information
AIRREP
Air Reports
ALRT
Alert
ALT
Altitude
ALT, ALTN
Alternator
ALTS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode
ALTV
VNAV Altitude Capture Mode
AMPS
Amperes
ANNUNC/ANN Annunciation/Annunciator
ANT
Antenna
AOA
Angle of Attack, ACARS Over AVLC
AOC
Aeronautical Operational Control
AOG
Aircraft On Ground
AOPA
Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
°C
C
CA
CAL
CALC
Calibrated
Airspeed
CAS
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CG
CH, CHNL
CHT
CHKLIST
CI
CLD
CLR
CM
CMC
CN
CNS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
COPLT
Course
APPENDICES
Course to
Steer
INDEX
CPDLC
CPL
CR
404
Degrees Celsius
Center Runway
Course to Altitude Leg
Calibrated
Calculator
Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
Crew Alerting System
Course to DME Distance Leg
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix Leg
Center of Gravity
Channel
Cylinder Head Temperature
Checklist
Course to Intercept Leg
Cloud
Clear
Centimeter
Central Maintenance Computer
Canada
Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
Carbon Monoxide
Communication Radio
Configuration
Coolant
Copilot
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or stay
on course. Provides the most efficient
heading to get back to the desired course
and proceed along the flight plan.
Controller Pilot Datalink Communications
Couple
Course to Radial Leg
CRG
CRNT
Crosstrack
Error
CRS
CRSR
CSA
CSC
CTA
CTR
CTRL
Cumulative,
CUM
CVDR
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYL
Cockpit Reference Guide
Current
The distance the aircraft is off a desired
course in either direction, left or right.
see also Course, Course to Steer
Cursor
Conflict Situational Awareness
Current Speed Control
Control Area
Center
Control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
D ALT
D-ATIS
DB, DBASE
dBZ
DCL
DCLTR, DECLTR
DEC FUEL
DEG
DEIC, DEICE
DEP
Desired Track
Density Altitude
Digital Automatic Terminal Info Service
Database
Decibels ‘Z’ (Radar Return)
Departure Clearance
Declutter
Decrease Fuel
Degree
De-icing
Departure
The desired course between the active
“from” and “to” waypoints.
Destination
Deviation
Direct to Fix Leg
Default
Directional Gyro
Degrade
Decision Height
DES, DEST
DEV
DF
DFLT
DG
DGRD
DH
Cockpit Voice Data Recorder
Cockpit Voice Recorder
Coverage
Control Wheel Steering
Cylinder
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Degrees Fahrenheit
Course From Fix to Altitude Leg
Federal Aviation Administration
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
Final Approach Fix
Failure
Future Air Navigation System
Fixed Base Operator
Course From Fix to Distance Leg
Federal Communication Commission
INDEX
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
APPENDICES
190-02286-00 Rev. A
°F
FA
FAA
FADEC
FAF
FAIL
FANS
FBO
FC
FCC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Empty, East
Engine and Airframe Systems
Engine Control Unit
Emergency Descent Mode
Expected Further Clearance
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel.
EGNOS
European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay Service
EGT
Exhaust Gas Temperature
EICAS
Engine Indication and Crew Alerting
System
EIS
Engine Indication System
ELEV
Elevation, Elevator
ELT
Emergency Locator Transmitter
EMER, EMERG, Emergency
EMERGCY
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
E
EAS
ECU
EDM
EFC
Efficiency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DTK
DQR
Endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible flight
time based on available fuel on board.
ENG
Engine
ENGD
Engaged
ENR
Enroute; ETE to Final Destination
Enroute Safe Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
Altitude (ESA) altitude within ten miles left or right of
the desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to.
ENT
Enter
EPE
see also Estimated Position Error
EPU
Estimated Position Uncertainty
ERR
Error
ES
Extended Squitter
ESA
see also Enroute Safe Altitude
ESP
Electronic Stability and Protection
Estimated
A measure of horizontal GPS position
Position Error error derived by satellite geometry
(EPE)
conditions and other factors.
Estimated
The estimated time at which the aircraft
Time of Arrival should reach the destination waypoint,
(ETA)
based upon current speed and track.
Estimated
The estimated time it takes to reach
Time Enroute the destination waypoint from the
(ETE)
present position, based upon current
groundspeed.
ETA
see also Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE
see also Estimated Time Enroute
EVS
Enhanced Vision System
EXPIRD
Expired
EIS
DL LTNG
DLS
DME
DN
DOP
DP
DPRT
DR
DSBL
DTG
END, ENDUR
Endurance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DIR
DIS
Distance
A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry, where
higher numbers equal poorer geometry).
Direction
Distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
Datalink Lightning
Data Link System
Distance Measuring Equipment
Down
see also Dilution of Precision
Departure Procedure
Departure
Dead Reckoning
Disabled
Distance To Go, Remaining distance to
last active FPL waypoint
see also Desired Track
Data Quality Requirements
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Dilution of
Precision
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
FCST
FD
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Forecast
Flight Director, Course From Fix to DME
Distance Leg
FDE
Fault Detection and Exclusion
FF, FFLOW
see also Fuel Flow
FIS-B
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
FISDL
Flight Information Service Data Link
FL
Flight Level
FLC
Flight Level Change
FLT
Flight Timer
FLTA
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
FM
Course From Fix to Manual Termination
Leg
FMS
Flight Management System
FOB
see also Fuel On Board
FOD
see also Fuel Over Destination
FPA
Flight Path Angle
FPL
Flight Plan
FPM
Feet Per Minute, Flight Path Marker
FREQ
Frequency
FRMT
Format
FRZ
Freezing
FSM
Flight System Messages
FSS
Flight Service Station
FT
foot/feet
Fuel Flow
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of
fuel per hour.
Fuel On Board The total amount of usable fuel on board
the aircraft.
Fuel Over
The estimated fuel remaining when the
Destination
aircraft reaches the destination waypoint,
based upon current fuel flow.
FWD
Forward
INDEX
G/S
GA
GAL, GL
GBOX
GBT
GCU
GCS
GDC
406
Glideslope
Go-Around
Gallon(s)
Gearbox
Ground Based Transceiver
Garmin Control Unit
Ground Clutter Suppression
Garmin Air Data Computer
GDL
GDR
GDU
GEA
GEO
GFC
GIA
GLONASS
Ground Track
GRS
GS
GSA
GSD
GSL
GSR
GSU
GTC
GTS
GTX
GWX
Garmin Satellite Data Link
Garmin Data Radio
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
Geographic
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Global Orbiting Navigation Satellite
Landing System
Global Navigation Satellite Landing
System
Garmin Audio Panel System
Garmin Mode Controller
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Ground
Gallons per Hour
Garmin Part Number
Global Positioning System
Ground Proximity Warning System
One degree latitude by one degree
longitude in size and clears the highest
elevation reference point in the grid by:
a) 1,000 feet where the highest elevation
is <5001MSL or b) 2,000 feet where the
highest elevation is >5000MSL
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position.
See Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed, Glideslope
Garmin Servo Adapter
Garmin Data Concentrator
Geodetic Sea Level
Garmin Satellite Radio
Garmin Sensor Unit
Garmin Touchscreen Controller
Garmin Traffic System
Garmin Transponder
Garmin Weather Radar
HA
Hold Terminating at Altitude Leg
GLS
GMA
GMC
GMT
GMU
GND
GPH
GPN
GPS
GPWS
Grid MORA
(Minimum
Off—Route
Altitude)
Groundspeed
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
Key Stuck
Kilogram
Kilohertz
Kilometer
Knot
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
KEYSTK
KG
kHz
KM
KT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
L
LAT
LBL
LB
LCD
LCL
LDA
LDG
LED
Left Over Fuel
On Board
Left, Left Runway
Latitude
Label
Pound
Liquid Crystal Display
Local
Landing Distance Available
ETA at Final Destination
Light Emitting Diode
The amount of fuel remaining on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to.
Left Over Fuel The amount of flight time remaining,
Reserve
based on the amount of fuel on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to, and a known
consumption rate.
Leg
The portion of a flight plan between two
waypoints.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
AFCS
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Inner Marker
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Speed
Indicated Air Temperature
Integrated Avionics Unit
International Civil Aviation Organization
Intercom System
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
Identification
Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
Initial Fix
Instrument Flight Rules
Imperial Gallon
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
ITT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
I
IAF
IAS
IAT
IAU
ICAO
ICS
ID
IDENT, IDNT
IEEE
IF
IFR
IG
ILS
IMC
Hectopascal
Horizontal Protection Level
Hour
Horizon Heading
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Heat
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hertz (cycles per second)
INFO
IN Hg
INS
INT
INTEG
IrDA, IRDA
ISA
Inch
Inactive
Increase Fuel
Indicator, Indicated
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation on the
aircraft panel.
Information
Inches of Mercury
Inertial Navigation System
Intersection(s)
Integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Infrared Data Association
International Standard Atmosphere; ISA
Relative Temperature
Inter-Turbine Temperature, Interstage
Turbine Temperature
EIS
HFOM
Hg
HI
HI SENS
HM
HNS
Horizontal
Figure of
Merit
hPa
HPL
HR
HRZN HDG
HSDB
HSI
HT
HUL
Hz
IN
INACTV
INC FUEL
IND
Indicated
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HF
see also Heading
Horizontal Dilution of Precision
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a magnetic
compass or a properly set directional
gyro.
High Frequency, Hold Terminating at Fix
Leg
see also Horizontal Figure of Merit
Mercury
High
High Sensitivity
Hold with Manual Termination Leg
Hybrid Navigation System
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s horizontal position.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HDG
HDOP
Heading
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LGND
LIFR
LMM
LNAV
LO
LOA
LOC
LOI
LOM
LON
LP
LPV
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LRU
LT
LTNG
LVL
Legend
Low Instrument Flight Rules
Location Middle Marker
Lateral Navigation
Low
Letter of Authorization
Localizer
Loss of Integrity (GPS)
Location Outer Marker
Longitude
Localizer Performance
Localizer Performance with Vertical
Guidance
Line Replaceable Unit
Left
Lightning
Level
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
M
Meter, Middle Marker, Mach
MMO (VMO)
Maximum Speed
Mach Number Mach number is the ratio of the true
airspeed to the speed of sound.
MAG
Magnetic
MAG VAR
Magnetic Variation
MAHP
Missed Approach Hold Point
MAN IN
Manifold Pressure (inches Hg)
MAN SQ
Manual Squelch
MANSEQ
Manual Sequence
MAP
Missed Approach Point
MASQ
Master Avionics Squelch
MAX
Maximum
MAXSPD
Maximum Speed (overspeed)
MB
Marker Beacon
MDA
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude
MEPT
Manual Electric Pitch Trim
MET
Manual Electric Trim
METAR
Aviation Routine Weather Report
MFD
Multi Function Display
MFW
Multi Function Window
MGRS
Military Grid Reference System
MHz
Megahertz
408
MIC
MIN
Minimum Safe
Altitude (MSA)
MKR
MOA
MON
MOV
MORA
MPEL
MPM
MSA
MSAS
MSG
MSL
MT, M
mV
MVFR
N
NAV
NAVAID
NDB
NEXRAD
NM
NoPT
NOTAM
NRST
O
OAT
OBS
OFST
OOOI
Microphone
Minimum
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
altitude within ten miles of the aircraft
present position.
Marker Beacon
Military Operations Area
Monitor
Movement
Minimum Off-Route Altitude
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level
Meters per Minute
see also Minimum Safe Altitude
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation
System
Message
Mean Sea Level
Meter
Millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
North
Navigation
Navigation Aid
Non-Directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
Nautical Mile(s)
No Procedure Turn Required (procedure
shall not be executed without ATC
clearance)
Notice To Airman
Nearest
OXY
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
Offset
Out of the gate, Off the ground, On the
ground, and In the gate
Oxygen
P ALT
Pressure Altitude
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-02286-00 Rev. A
South
Selective Availability
Search and Rescue
Static Air Temperature
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
Second(s)
Select
Selective Calling
Sense
Surface
Standard Instrument Approach
Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
SIGMET/AIRMET
Significant Meteorological Information
Simulator
Supercooled Large Droplet
Slip/Skid
AFCS
RAM
RAT
RCVR
REF
REM
SID
SIG/AIR
SIGMET
SIM
SLD
SLP/SKD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Right, Right Runway
Resolution Advisory, Radio Altimeter
Radial
Radio Altimeter
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
Random Access Memory
Ram Air Temperature
Receiver
Reference
Remaining (fuel remaining), Reminder
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
R
RA
RAD
RAD ALT
RAIM
S
SA
SAR
SAT
SBAS
SCIT
SD
SEC
SEL, SLCT
SELCAL
SENS
SFC
SIAP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Field Elevation Pressure
Sea Level Pressure
Quantity
RMI
RMT
RNAV
RNG
RNP
RNWY, RWY
ROL
ROM
RPM
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RVRSNRY
RVSM
RX
Required
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Reverse, Revision, Revise
Radio Frequency, Constant Radius Turn to
Fix Leg
Radio Magnetic Indicator
Remote
Area Navigation
Range
Required Navigation Performance
Runway
Roll
Read Only Memory
Revolutions Per Minute
Reset Fuel
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Right
Reversionary
Reduced Vertical Separation Minimums
Receive
EIS
QFE
QNH
QTY
REQ
RES
REV
RF
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Passenger Address, Proximity Advisory
Passenger(s)
Personal Computer
Pre-Departure Clearance
Primary Flight Display
Pilot’s Guide
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept Leg
Pilot Report
Pitch
Plain Old ACARS
Pilot’s Operating Handbook
Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement
Position
Pounds per Hour
Parts per Million
Present Position
Pressure
Procedure(s), Procedure Turn
Propeller
Proximity
Pounds per Square Inch
Procedure Turn
Parallel Track
Push-to-Talk
Power
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PA
PASS
PC
PDC
PFD
PG
PI
PIREP
PIT, PTCH
POA
POH
POHS
POS, POSN
PPH
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
PROP
PROX
PSI
PT
PTK
PTT
PWR
409
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
410
SMBL
SMS
SNGL
SPC
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
SRVC, SVC
SSID
STAB
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
STRMSCP
SUA
SURF
SUSP
SVT
SW
SYNC
SYN TERR
SYN VIS
SYS
Symbol
Short Message System
Single
Space
Speed
Special Position Identification
Speaker
Squelch
Service
Wireless Service Set Identifier
Stabilization
Stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
Statistics
Standby
Standard
Stormscope
Special Use Airspace
Surface
Suspend
Synthetic Vision Technology
Software
Synchronize
Synthetic Terrain
Synthetic Vision
System
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
True
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed, Traffic Advisory System
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Alert Collision Avoidance System
Telephone
Temperature
Terminal
Track Between Two Fixes Leg
TFR
TGT
T HDG
TIS
TIS-B
TIT
TKE
TMA
TMR/REF
TOC
TOD
TOGA, TO/GA
TOLD
TOPO
TORA
TOT
TPA
Track
Track Angle
Error
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
TTL
TURB
TURN
TWIP
TX
Temporary Flight Restriction
Target
True Heading
Traffic Information Service
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast
Turbine Inlet Temperature
see also Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
Top of Climb
Top of Descent
Take-Off, Go-Around
Takeoff and Landing Data
Topographic
Takeoff Run Available
Total
Traffic Pattern Altitude
Direction of aircraft movement relative to
a ground position; also ‘Ground Track’.
The angle difference between the desired
track and the current track.
see also Track
Terminal Radar Service Area
Truncated
Total
Turbulence
Procedure Turn
Terminal Weather Information for Pilots
Transmit
UAT
UHF
UNAVAIL
US
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
Universal Access Transceiver
Ultra-High Frequency
Unavailable
United States
User
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal
Polar Stereographic Grid
V
V, Vspeed
Volts
Velocity (airspeed)
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX C
VMC
VNAV, VNV
VOL
VOR
VORTAC
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
Yaw Damper
APPENDICES
YD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Transfer
SiriusXM Lightning
Transponder
Cross-Talk
Cross-Track, Crosstrack Error
AFCS
XFER, XFR
XM LTNG
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WOG
WOW
WPT
WT
WW
WX
Watt(s), West
Wide Area Augmentation System
Warning
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight
World Geodetic System - 1984
Wireless Local Area Network based on
IEEE 802.11
Weight on Gear
Weight on Wheels
Waypoint(s)
Weight
World Wide
Weather
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
W
WAAS
WARN
WATCH
WGS-84
WI-FI, WIFI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VPATH, VPTH
VPL
VPROF
VR
VRP
VS
VSD
VSI
VSR, VS REQ
VTF
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
Leg
Visual Meteorological Conditions
Vertical Navigation
Volume
VHF Omnidirectional Range
VHF Omnidirectional Range Station and
Tactical Air Navigation
Vertical Path
Vertical Protection Level
VNAV Profile, Vertical Profile
Heading Vector to Radial Leg
Visual Reporting Point
Vertical Speed
Vertical Situation Display
Vertical Speed Indicator
see also Vertical Speed Required
Vector to Final
EIS
190-02286-00 Rev. A
VM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Takeoff Decision Speed
Takeoff Safety Speed
Maneuvering Speed
Approach Climb Speed
Maximum Flap Extended Speed
Maximum Landing Gear Extended Speed
Approach Speed (Flaps at x°)
Maximum Landing Gear Operating Speed
Minimum Control Speed
Maximum Operating Speed
Never-Exceed Speed
Takeoff Rotate Speed
Landing Approach Speed, Reference
Landing Speed
VSB
Maximum Speedbrake Speed
VSR
Stall Speed
VT
Takeoff Flap Retraction Speed
VTIRE
Maximum Tire Speed
VX
Best Angle of Climb Speed
VY
Best Rate of Climb Speed
VYSE
Best Single-Engine Rate of Climb Speed
V DEV
Vertical Deviation
VA
Heading Vector to Altitude Leg
VAC
Volts Alternating Current
VAPP
VOR Approach
VAR
Variation
VD
Heading Vector to DME Distance Leg
VDC
Volts Direct Current
VDL
VHF Datalink
VERT
Vertical
Vertical Figure A measure of the uncertainty in the
of Merit
aircraft’s vertical position.
Vertical Speed The vertical speed necessary to descend/
Required
climb from a current position and altitude
to a defined target position and altitude,
based upon current groundspeed.
VFOM
see also Vertical Figure of Merit
VFR
Visual Flight Rules
VHF
Very High Frequency
VI
Heading Vector to Intercept Leg
VLOC
VOR/Localizer Receiver
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
V1
V2
VA
VAPP , VAC
VFE
VLE
VLNDx
VLO
VMC
VMO (MMO)
VNE
VR
VREF
411
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
Blank Page
412
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a particular aspect of system operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in
the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garmin-authorized
dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
What is SBAS?
EIS
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
on GPS for all phases of flight.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the Middle East, and parts of northern
Africa. The Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan.
How does SBAS affect approach operations?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
AFCS
The implementation of RNAV LP and LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities.
RNAV LPV approaches are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This approach
combines localizer precision lateral guidance with vertical guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing
System (ILS). RNAV LPV approaches allow lower approach minimums.
What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight
APPENDICES
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
system monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A). Without
RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the pilot
must fly the missed approach procedure.
What is GSL altitude?
EIS
GSL (Geodetic Sea Level) altitude is the height above Mean Sea Level (MSL), as calculated geometrically,
generally using a global positioning system (GPS) as the primary data source. The calculated result may or may
not include a barometric component, but the primary source is geometric.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Why might there be no approaches available for a flight plan?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the system indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival be stored?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note the most recent active flight
plan is restored when the system is turned on, if the aircraft position is the same as the origin airport in the most
recent active flight plan. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When
storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from
the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the system automatically
updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should an approach, departure, or
arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the procedure is deleted from the
flight plan.
Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the G950 NXi?
APPENDICES
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The system meets the requirements of TSO-C145a Class 3 or TSO-C145c
Class 3, and ETSO C145 Class 3 installations. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database.
See the approved AFM as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more information.
What does the OBS Softkey do?
INDEX
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
the system automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
414
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX D
OBS
Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected waypoint
Manually select course to waypoint from HSI
Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
Cannot be set for final approach course or published holding patterns
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
•
•
•
•
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
•
•
•
•
Normal (OBS not activated)
Automatic sequencing of waypoints
Manual course change on HSI not possible
Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
Must be in this mode for final approach course
When OBS mode is active, the system allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
EIS
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The system suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the system from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Selecting
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Why might the System not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no ‘OBS’ or
‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the bisector of
the turn being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs
at an equal angle from each leg.
How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach, a departure, or an arrival?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and selecting the ACT Leg Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS then
provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
AFCS
When does turn anticipation begin?
The system smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
APPENDICES
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
When does the CDI scale change?
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Once a departure is activated, the system Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3
nm. The CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm
from the departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm
back to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the service level of the active approach (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LP, and LPV). When a
missed approach is activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on
CDI scaling.
EIS
Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
What is the correct missed approach procedure? How is the missed approach holding point selected?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To comply with TSO specifications, the system does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT Leg Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
activated?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
AFCS
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The system directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘Activate Approach’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The system provides navigation along
the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
APPENDICES
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘Select Approach’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the desired
transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.
INDEX
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
416
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX F
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MISCELLANEOUS MAP SYMBOLS
Item
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
Map Pointer (when panning)
EIS
Measuring Pointer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
User Waypoint
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Parallel Track Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Displayed when aircraft GPS location is
valid, but heading is invalid.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Top of Descent (TOD)
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
AFCS
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Garmin G950 Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
417
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX F
Blank Page
418
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
INDEX
EIS
B
Backlighting-------------------------------------------------- 40
Barometric Altimeter Setting---------------------------42, 48
Bearing/distance, measuring------------------------------133
Bearing Information-------------------------------------43, 62
Bearing Pointer----------------------------------------------- 61
Bearing Source----------------------------------------------- 62
Bluetooth-----------------------------------------------------182
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
C
Calibrated Airspeed-----------------------------------------231
CAUTION-----------------------------------------------------381
Caution alerts-----------------------------------------------383
Chart Not Available-----------------------------------------351
Chart options----------------------------------------- 355, 362
CHART SETUP box----------------------------------- 357, 363
ChartView--------------------------------------------- 345, 350
Checklists--------------------------------------------- 375–376
Circle of Uncertainty----------------------------------------364
Closest Point-------------------------------------------------204
COM channel spacing--------------------------------------100
COM Frequency Box----------------------------------- 96, 101
COM Tuning Failure-----------------------------------------121
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA)--------------------329
Controls--------------------------------------------------------- 4
Copy a Flight Plan------------------------------------------195
Correlation---------------------------------------------------329
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)--------------- 55–59, 224
Creating User Waypoints----------------------------------163
Crew Alerting System (CAS)
Messages------------------------------------------- 380–381
Crew Profile
Exporting--------------------------------------------------- 31
Import/Export Messages--------------------------------- 32
Importing--------------------------------------------------- 30
Crew Profiles---------------------------------------------27, 28
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
190-02286-00 Rev. A
Attitude Indicator-------------------------------------------- 44
Audio Panel----------------------------------------------------- 9
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation--------------------------121
Auto-designating-------------------------------------------211
Automatic Dependent
Surveillance-Rebroadcast (ADS-R)-----------------------328
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)--------- 343–344
Automatic squelch------------------------------------------- 97
Auto-tuning, COM------------------------------------------- 97
Auto-tuning, NAV------------------------------------ 103, 104
Auto Zoom---------------------------------------------------130
AUX - system status page---------------------------------367
Aviation Symbols------------------------------- 137, 138, 142
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activate a Flight Plan---------------------------------------194
Active frequency---------------------------------96, 101, 102
ADF---------------------------------------------------------106
AC-U-KWIK------------------------------------------- 366, 396
ADF
ADF mode------------------------------------------ 106, 108
ANT mode-------------------------------------------------108
Volume---------------------------------------------- 106, 108
ADF audio----------------------------------------------------102
ADF/BFO-----------------------------------------------------108
ADF frequency tuning--------------------------------------107
AHRS---------------------------------------384, 385, 387, 388
AIRB----------------------------------------------------------331
Air Data Computer (ADC)------------------------------------ 1
Failure------------------------------------------------------- 14
Airport
Nearest----------------------------------------------------150
Airport Directory------------------------------------- 366, 396
Airport Information---------------------------------- 147, 153
Airspace
Altitude Buffer--------------------------------------------168
Smart-------------------------------------------------------170
Airspace Alerts--------------------------------------- 169, 236
Airspeed Indicator---------------------------------------42, 45
Airways-------------------------------------------------------141
Collapsing/Expanding-----------------------------------204
Alerting system----------------------------------------------379
Alerts
Aircraft-----------------------------------------------------382
Arrival------------------------------------------------------- 35
Audio voice--------------------------------------------35, 36
Levels------------------------------------------------------380
Along Track Offset----------------------------------- 199, 200
Altimeter--------------------------------------------------42, 47
Altitude Alerting--------------------------------------------- 65
Altitude Constraints----------------------------------------210
Annunciations
AHRS-------------------------------------------------------- 11
Power Up----------------------------------------------------- 7
System------------------------------------------------ 10, 383
Test tone---------------------------------------------------- 12
Annunciator lights------------------------------------------114
ANT/BFO-----------------------------------------------------108
AOPA-------------------------------------------------- 345, 396
Approach-----------------------------------------------------414
Activating-------------------------------------------------227
Loading--------------------------------------- 192, 225, 226
Procedure and Service Levels---------------------------224
Removing--------------------------------------------------228
Approach channel----------------------------------- 193, 225
APR softkey------------------------------------------- 227, 233
Arrival Alerts-------------------------------------------------- 35
Arrival procedure------------------ 176, 177, 192, 222, 223
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)---- 1, 12
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A
I-1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
D
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Database(s)----------------------------------------------------- 7
Data Link Receiver------------------------------------------377
Datalink receiver troubleshooting------------------------377
Data logging-------------------------------------------------374
Date and time------------------------------------------------ 32
Day/Night views-------------------------------------- 357, 363
Day view-----------------------------------------------------358
DB Mismatch------------------------------------------------395
Dead Reckoning------------------------------------------82, 83
Dead Reckoning Mode-------------------------------------235
Decision Height---------------------------------------------- 66
Declutter, Display-------------------------------------------- 83
Deleting
An entire airway----------------------------------- 196, 197
An entire procedure------------------------------ 197, 198
An individual waypoint--------------------------- 196, 197
Flight Plan Items-----------------------------------------196
Flight Plans------------------------------------------------195
Density Altitude---------------------------------------------233
Departure
Procedure------------------------------------ 190, 219, 221
Select------------------------------------219, 222, 225, 227
Time--------------------------------------------------------231
Designating a Waypoint
Manually--------------------------------------------------212
Dilution of Precision (DOP)--------------------------------- 15
Direct-to--------- 146, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 209, 210
Display backup-------------------------------------------- 9, 95
DME
HOLD mode-----------------------------------------------109
NAV1 mode-----------------------------------------------109
NAV2 mode-----------------------------------------------109
Tuning mode--------------------------------------- 106, 109
DME audio---------------------------------------------------102
DME Information Window---------------------------------- 62
DME tuning--------------------------------------------------109
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
E
APPENDICES
Electronic Checklists--------------------------------- 375, 376
Emergency Checklist---------------------------------------376
Emergency Frequency--------------------------------------121
Engine Indication System (EIS)------------------------ 85–90
Entering Flight ID-------------------------------------------110
Entertainment inputs---------------------------------------119
Estimated Position Error (EPE)----------------------------- 15
F
INDEX
Failure
Air Data Input--------------------------------------------- 14
GPS Input--------------------------------------------------- 14
LRU---------------------------------------------------------- 10
Magnetometer--------------------------------------------- 14
I-2
Field of View (SVT)------------------------------------------144
Flight ID------------------------------------------------------110
Flight Instruments----------------------------------41, 41–56
Flight Path Angle (FPA)------------------------------------210
Flight plan
Storing-----------------------------------------------------414
Flight Plan
Import/Export Messages--------------------------------181
Flight Plan, Active
Creating---------------------------------------------------178
Inverting---------------------------------------------------202
Leg Type---------------------------------------------------176
Procedures------------------------------------------------217
Flight Plan, Stored
Activating-------------------------------------------------195
Adding Procedures---------------------------------------188
Invert and Activate---------------------------------------202
Viewing----------------------------------------------------194
Flight Stream 510-------------------------------------------182
FliteCharts-------------------------------------- 345, 358, 359
Functions--------------------------------------------------360
Frequently asked questions--------------------------------413
Fuel
Efficiency--------------------------------------------------233
Endurance-------------------------------------------------233
Remaining-------------------------------------------------233
Required---------------------------------------------------233
Statistics---------------------------------------------------232
Fuel on Board-----------------------------------------------233
Fuel Range Ring---------------------------------------------144
G
Geodetic Sea Level (GSL)----------------------------------290
Glidepath Indicator------------------------------------------ 49
Glideslope Indicator----------------------------------------- 49
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation----------------------------------------- 171–236
Receiver information--------------------------------- 16–18
Receiver Operation---------------------------------------- 14
GMA 1347------------------------------------------------------ 7
Groundspeed------------------------------------------------- 38
H
Heading------------------------------------------------------- 42
Heading Bug-------------------------------------------------- 42
HI SENS-------------------------------------------------------105
Holding
User Defined----------------------------------------------204
Horizontal Situation
Indicator (HSI)--------------------42, 52–54, 224, 415, 416
double green arrow--------------------------------------102
magenta arrow-------------------------------------------102
single green arrow---------------------------------------102
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
INDEX
L
M
Obstacles---------------------------------------------- 386, 388
Odometer----------------------------------------------------- 38
Oil Pressure (OIL PSI)------------------------------------87, 88
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)------------------ 59, 414–415
Optional Equipment------------------------------------------- 2
Other Statistics--------------------------------------- 231, 233
Outside Air Temperature------------------------------------ 42
P
AFCS
Page groups--------------------------------------------- 25–28
Parallel Track-------------------------------------------------200
Passenger address------------------------------------------117
PA system----------------------------------------------------117
Pending Flight Plan---------------------------- 182, 183, 184
Power-up Page----------------------------------------------375
Primary Flight Display (PFD)---------------------------------- 1
HSI Map---------------------------------------------------124
Inset Map-------------------------------------------------124
Messages--------------------------------------------------169
Navigation Status Box-----------------------------------125
Procedure Pages--------------------------------------------- 27
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-02286-00 Rev. A
O
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Magnetometer----------------------------------------------- 14
Manually Designating--------------------------------------212
Map
Decluttering-----------------------------------------------139
Detail-------------------------------------------------------139
Orientation------------------------------------------------127
Range------------------------------------------------------129
Map Panning------------------------------------------------131
Marker Beacon----------------------------------------------105
Marker Beacon Annunciations----------------------------- 66
MASQ processing-------------------------------------------- 91
Measurement units, changing displayed----------------- 34
Menus--------------------------------------------------------- 23
Messages
Reminder--------------------------------------------------- 38
Minimum Descent Altitude--------------------------------- 66
Missed Approach------------------------------------ 176, 228
MKR/MUTE--------------------------------------------------105
Mode S-------------------------------------------------------110
Mode selection softkeys---------------------------- 110, 111
Morse code identifier---------------------------------------101
Motion Vectors----------------------------------------------336
Multi Function Display (MFD)
Controls------------------------------------------------------ 4
LRU description---------------------------------------------- 1
Navigation Data Bar-------------------------------------126
Page Groups----------------------------------------------- 24
Power-up Page---------------------------------------------- 7
Reversionary Mode----------------------------------------- 9
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Land Symbols------------------------------------------------136
Lighting
Backlighting------------------------------------------------ 40
Line Replaceable Units---------------------------------------- 1
Failure---------------------------------------------------10, 12
LO SENS------------------------------------------------------105
Low Altitude Annunciation--------------------------------- 65
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
National Weather Service (NWS)-------------------------275
NAV1 audio--------------------------------------------------102
NAV2 audio--------------------------------------------------102
Navigation
Database--------------------------------------------------210
Map--------------------------------------------------------174
Navigation mode selection--------------------------------102
Navigation (NAV) Frequency Box-------------------------- 42
Navigation Source-------------------------------------- 55–56
Nav radio selection-----------------------------------------102
NDB-----------------------------------------------------------156
Nearest
Airport--------------------------- 150, 151, 152, 153, 226
Airport Minimum Runway Length---------------------153
Airport Surface Matching-------------------------------153
VOR--------------------------------------------------------159
VRP-------------------------------------------------- 160, 161
Nearest airports, frequency tuning------------------------ 98
NextGen------------------------------------------------------327
Night view---------------------------------------------------358
No Available Charts----------------------------------------360
Normal display operation------------------------------------- 8
EIS
IDENT function----------------------------------------------111
ID indicator--------------------------------------------------101
ILS Information----------------------------------------------158
Import/Export Flight Plan----------------------------------180
Messages--------------------------------------------------185
Indicated Altitude-------------------------------------------231
Inset Map----------------------------------------------------- 43
Intercom system (ICS)--------------------------------------119
Intersection--------------------------------------------------154
Intersection Information---------------------------- 154–155
Inverting a Flight Plan--------------------------------------202
IOI------------------------------------------------------ 297, 298
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
N
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
I
I-3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
R
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM)--------------------------16–17, 224, 413
Reminder messages----------------------------------------- 38
Reversionary Mode-------------------------------------------- 9
ROC---------------------------------------------------- 297, 298
RS-232----------------------------------------------------------- 1
RS-485----------------------------------------------------------- 1
Runway Extension------------------------------------------139
RX indicator--------------------------------------------------- 97
EIS
S
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Safe Operating Annunciations----------------------------383
SafeTaxi------------------------------------------------ 345, 346
SBAS----------------------------------------------------- 18, 413
Scheduler------------------------------------------------- 38–39
Secure Digital (SD) card-------------------------- 6, 375, 395
Export Pilot Profile---------------------------------------- 31
Import Pilot Profile---------------------------------------- 30
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc----------------------------145
Selected Course------------------------------------------43, 54
Selected Heading----------------------------------------43, 53
Sequencing waypoints
Automatic-------------------------------------------------415
SIGMET-------------------------------------------------------265
SiriusXM Radio--------------------------------------- 369, 370
SiriusXM Radio Active Channel---------------------------371
SiriusXM Radio Presets------------------------------------371
SiriusXM Radio Service Class-----------------------------370
SiriusXM Radio Volume------------------------------------372
SiriusXM Weather
AIREPs-----------------------------------------------------279
AIRMETs---------------------------------------------------265
Cell Movement-------------------------------------------264
Cloud Tops------------------------------------------------262
County Warnings-----------------------------------------275
Cyclones & Hurricanes----------------------------------276
Echo Tops--------------------------------------------------261
Freezing Level---------------------------------------------271
Icing--------------------------------------------------------277
Lightning--------------------------------------------------263
PIREPs-----------------------------------------------------279
SIGMETs---------------------------------------------------265
Surface Analysis------------------------------------------269
Turbulence-------------------------------------------------278
Winds Aloft------------------------------------------------272
Slip/Skid Indicator----------------------------------------42, 44
Softkeys----------------------------------------------19–26, 42
EIS----------------------------------------------------------- 22
MFD--------------------------------------------------------- 22
PFD---------------------------------------------------------- 19
Speaker-------------------------------------------------------114
I-4
Split COM operation----------------------------------------118
SQ annunciation--------------------------------------------116
Standby frequency-------------------------- 96, 97, 101, 102
ADF---------------------------------------------------------106
Standby frequency field------------------------------- 96, 101
Standby Navigation Database----------------------------397
Stereo headsets---------------------------------------------114
Stuck microphone-------------------------------------------121
Sunrise / Sunset---------------------------------------------232
SURF----------------------------------------------------------331
Surface Analysis---------------------------------------------269
SUSP----------------------------------------------------------- 60
SVT------------------------------------------------------------391
SVT Troubleshooting----------------------------------------377
Symbols, map------------------------------------------------417
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)------------------------- 68
Troubleshooting------------------------------------------- 83
System
Annunciations--------------------------------------------379
System Alerting----------------------------------------------- 65
System Settings---------------------------------------------- 27
System Status Page------------------------------------------ 12
System Time--------------------------------------------------- 42
T
Tachometer (RPM)---------------------------------------87, 88
TAS------------------------------------------------------------385
TAS Traffic
Non-Threat Traffic----------------------------------------316
PA----------------------------------------------------------316
Proximity Advisory---------------------------------------316
Temperature Compensation-------------------------------229
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF)----------------------267
Terminal procedures charts-------------349, 351, 360, 364
Terrain--------------------------------------------------------386
Terrain Proximity--------------------------------------------289
Terrain-SVS---------------------------------------------------343
Timer----------------------------------------------------------- 37
Departure-----------------------------------------------37, 38
Flight-------------------------------------------------------- 37
Generic, PFD----------------------------------------------- 37
TOPO
Data------------------------------------------------- 135, 142
Display-----------------------------------------------------134
Scale-------------------------------------------------------136
Track Indicator------------------------------------------------ 52
Track Vector--------------------------------------------------143
Traffic
Annunciation---------------------------------------------- 43
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B)-----------328
Transfer from Wireless Connection:----------------------182
Transponder--------------------------------------------------- 21
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
INDEX
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Transponder data box--------------------------------------- 91
Transponder mode field------------------------------------- 91
Transponder standby mode-------------------------------111
Transponder Status Box------------------------------------- 42
Trip Planning------------------------------------ 231, 232, 233
Trip Statistics-------------------------------------------- 38, 232
True Airspeed (TAS)------------------------------- 42, 45, 233
Turn anticipation--------------------------------------------415
Turn Rate Indicator--------------------------------------42, 61
TX indicator--------------------------------------------------- 97
EIS
U
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unable to Display Chart---------------------------- 351, 360
Units of Measure--------------------------------------------- 34
User-Defined Holding Pattern-----------------------------208
User Waypoint-----------------------------------------------162
Utilities-------------------------------------------------------- 36
V
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical Navigation (VNAV)------------------------ 175, 210
Direct-to---------------------------------------------------210
Guidance--------------------------------------------------211
Enabling---------------------------------------------------209
Indications------------------------------------------------- 50
Vertical Situation Display (VSD)-------------------- 214, 215
Messages--------------------------------------------------216
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)--------------------------42, 49
VFR code-----------------------------------------------------113
Voice alerts--------------------------------------------------382
Voice Alerts, TIS Traffic--------------------------------------311
VOL annunciation-------------------------------------------116
Volume-------------------------------------------------------372
Volume level
ADF-------------------------------------------------- 106, 108
VOR-----------------------------------------------------------158
VOR, NearestSee Nearest: VOR
VOR selection------------------------------------------------102
VRP---------------------------------------------- 137, 160, 161
VS TGT--------------------------------------------------------210
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
W
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
INDEX
190-02286-00 Rev. A
APPENDICES
WAAS-------------------------------------------------- 388, 413
Warning alerts-----------------------------------------------382
Waypoint-----------------------------------------------------146
Automatic sequencing----------------------------------415
Creating---------------------------------------------------163
Selection Submenu------------------------------- 172, 186
Skipping---------------------------------------------------415
User--------------------------------------------------------162
Weather (real-time)-------------------------------------------- 2
Wind----------------------------------------------------------144
I-5
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDEX
Blank Page
I-6
Garmin G950 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Tecnam P2006T
190-02286-00 Rev. A
G950®
Pilot’s Guide
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan
Tecnam P2006T
Garmin International, Inc. Garmin AT, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
2345 Turner Road SE
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A. Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
www.flygarmin.com
190-02286-00
Revision A
G950
Pilot’s Guide
Cirrus SR2x
Tecnam P2006T
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising